fvwm2

FVWM(1)                           Fvwm 2.6.8                           FVWM(1)



NAME
       Fvwm - F? Virtual Window Manager for X11

SYNOPSIS
       fvwm [-c config-command] [-d displayname] [-f config-file] [-r]
            [-s [screen_num]] [-V] [-C visual-class | -I visual-id]
            [-l colors [-L] [-A] [-S] [-P]] [-D] [-h] [-i client-id]
            [-F state-file] [--debug-stack-ring] [-blackout]

DESCRIPTION
       Fvwm is a window manager for X11.  It is designed to minimize memory
       consumption, provide a 3D look to window frames, and a virtual desktop.

       Note that there are several window managers around that have "fvwm" in
       their name.  In the past, version 2.x of fvwm was commonly called fvwm2
       to distinguish it from the former version 1.x (fvwm or even fvwm1).
       Since version 1.x has been replaced by version 2.x a long time ago we
       simply call version 2.x and all versions to come, fvwm, throughout this
       document, and the executable program is named fvwm.  There is an fvwm
       offspring called fvwm95, it is mostly a patched version of fvwm-2.0.43.
       The main goal of fvwm95 was to supply a Windows 95 like look and feel.
       Since then, fvwm has been greatly enhanced and practically all fvwm95
       features can be achieved by fvwm.

       Fvwm provides both a large virtual desktop and multiple disjoint
       desktops which can be used separately or together.  The virtual desktop
       allows you to pretend that your video screen is really quite large, and
       you can scroll around within the desktop.  The multiple disjoint
       desktops allow you to pretend that you really have several screens to
       work at, but each screen is completely unrelated to the others.

       Fvwm provides keyboard accelerators that allow you to perform most
       window manager functions, including moving and resizing windows and
       operating the menus, using keyboard shortcuts.

       Fvwm has also overcome the distinction between configuration commands
       and action commands that most window managers make.  Configuration
       commands typically set fonts, colors, menu contents, and key and mouse
       function bindings, while action commands do things like raise and lower
       windows.  Fvwm makes no such distinction and allows anything to be
       changed at any time.

       Other noteworthy differences between fvwm and other X11 window managers
       are the introduction of the SloppyFocus and NeverFocus focus methods.
       Focus policy can be separately specified for different window groups.
       Windows using SloppyFocus acquire focus when the pointer moves into
       them and retain focus until some other window acquires it.  Such
       windows do not lose focus when the pointer moves into the root window.
       The NeverFocus policy is provided for use with windows into which one
       never types (e.g. xclock, oclock, xbiff, xeyes, tuxeyes) - for example,
       if a SloppyFocus terminal window has focus, moving the pointer over a
       NeverFocus decoration window does not deprive the terminal of focus.

OPTIONS
       These are the command line options that are recognized by fvwm:

       -i | --clientid id
           This option is used when fvwm is started by a session manager.
           Should not be used by a user.

       -c | --cmd config-command
           Causes fvwm to use config-command instead of 'Read config' (or
           'Read .fvwm2rc') as its initialization command.  (Note that up to
           10 -f and -c parameters can be given, and they are executed in the
           order specified.)

           Any module started by command line arguments is assumed to be a
           module that sends back config commands.  All command line modules
           have to quit before fvwm proceeds on to the StartFunction and
           setting border decorations and styles.  There is a potential
           deadlock if you start a module other than FvwmCpp/FvwmM4/FvwmPerl
           but there is a timeout so fvwm eventually gets going.

           As an example, starting the pager this way hangs fvwm until the
           timeout, but the following should work well:

               fvwm -c "AddToFunc StartFunction I Module FvwmPager"

       -d | --display displayname
           Manage the display called displayname instead of the name obtained
           from the environment variable $DISPLAY.

       -D | --debug
           Puts X transactions in synchronous mode, which dramatically slows
           things down, but guarantees that fvwm's internal error messages are
           correct.  Also causes fvwm to output debug messages while running.

       -f config-file
           Causes fvwm to read config-file instead of ~/.fvwm/config as its
           initialization file.  This is equivalent to -c 'Read config-file'.

       -h | --help
           A short usage description is printed.

       -r | --replace
           Try to take over from a previously running wm.  This does not work
           unless the other wm is ICCCM2 2.0 compliant.

       -F | --restore state-file
           This option is used when fvwm is started by a session manager.
           Should not be used by a user.

       -s | --single-screen [screen_num]
           On a multi-screen display, run fvwm only on the screen named in the
           $DISPLAY environment variable or provided through the -d option.
           The optional argument screen_num should be positive or null and
           override the screen number.  Normally, fvwm attempts to start up on
           all screens of a multi-screen display.

       -V | --version
           Prints the version of fvwm to stderr.  Also prints an information
           about the compiled in support for readline, rplay, stroke, xpm,
           png, svg, GNOME hints, EWMH hints, session management,
           bidirectional text, multibyte characters, xinerama and Xft aa font
           rendering.

       -C | --visual visual-class
           Causes fvwm to use visual-class for the window borders and menus.
           visual-class can be "StaticGray", "GrayScale", "StaticColor",
           "PseudoColor", "TrueColor" or "DirectColor".

       -I | --visualid id
           Causes fvwm to use id as the visual id for the window borders and
           menus.  id can be specified as N for decimal or 0xN for
           hexadecimal.  See man page of xdpyinfo for a list of supported
           visuals.

       -l | --color-limit limit
           Specifies a limit on the colors used in image, gradient and
           possibly simple colors used by fvwm.  In fact, fvwm (and all the
           modules) uses a palette with at most limit colors.  This option is
           only useful with screens that display 256 colors (or less) with a
           dynamic visual (PseudoColor, GrayScale or DirectColor).  The
           default depends on your X server and how you run fvwm.  In most
           case this default is reasonable.  The -l option should be used only
           if you encounter problems with colors.  By default, fvwm tries to
           detect large pre-allocated palettes.  If such a palette is detected
           fvwm uses it and a priori the -l must not be used.  Moreover, in
           this case the -A and -S options are forced.  Note that XFree-4.2
           pre-allocates 244 colors (if you use a driver with Render support)
           leaving only a few free colors.  This may lead to some color
           problems (and nothing can be done).  XFree-4.3 or better
           pre-allocate only 85 colors.  If no pre-allocated palette is auto
           detected the defaults are as follow:

           Display depth 8 (256 colors)

                   PseudoColor: 68 (4x4x4 color cube + 4 grey)
                   GrayScale: 64 regular grey
                   DirectColor: 32 (3x3x3 color cube + 5 grey)

           Display depth 4 (16 colors)

                   PseudoColor: 10 (2x2x2 color cube + 2 grey)
                   GrayScale: 8 regular grey
                   DirectColor: 10 (2x2x2 color cube + 2 grey)

           These defaults may change before version 2.6.  Note that if you use
           a private color map (i.e., fvwm is started with the -C or the -I
           options), then other defaults are used.

           Now what to do if you encounter problems with colors? The first
           thing to do is to check if you really cannot run your X server with
           depth 15, 16 or better.  Check your X server documentation.  Note
           that some hardware can support two different depths on the same
           screen (typically depth 8 and depth 24).  If depth 8 is the
           default, you can force fvwm to use the best depth by using the -C
           option with TrueColor as argument.  So now we assume that you are
           forced to run in depth 8 with a dynamic visual because your
           hardware/driver cannot do better or because you need to use an
           application which needs to run under this mode (e.g., because this
           application needs read-write colors).  What it should be understand
           is that you have only 256 colors and that all the applications
           which use the default color map must share these colors.  The main
           problem is that there are applications which use a lot or even all
           the colors.  If you use such application you may have no more free
           colors and some applications (which used only a few colors) may
           fail to start or are unusable.  There are three things that can be
           done (and fvwm does not really play a particular role, all
           applications are concerned).  The first is to run the applications
           which waste your (default) color map with a private color map.  For
           example, run netscape with the -install option, run KDE or QT
           applications with the --cmap option, use the -C option for fvwm.
           The disadvantage of this method is that it is visually disturbing
           (see the ColormapFocus command for a better control of the color
           maps switching).  The second method is to limit the number of
           colors that the applications use.  Again, some applications have
           options to specify a given color limit.  With fvwm you may try
           various values, 61 (a special "visual" palette), 56 (a 4x4x3 color
           cube plus 6 grey), 29 (a 3x3x3 color cube plus 2 grey), 10 or 9.
           Also, you may use the -L option.  However, limiting the number of
           colors is not the definitive solution.  The definitive solution is
           to try cause applications which use a lot of colors use the same
           colors.  This is a difficult task as there are no formal standards
           for this goal.  However, some toolkits as QT and GTK use color
           cubes as palettes.  So, the idea is to configure your
           applications/toolkits to all use the same color cube.  Moreover,
           you can use the colors in this color cube in your X resources
           configuration files and/or as arguments to colors options.  Fvwm
           can use any color cube of the form RxGxB with 2 <= R <= 6, R = G,
           R-1 =< B <= R and B >= 2.  To get an RxGxB color cube give an
           argument to -l an integer c >= R*G*B and < (R+1)*(G+1)*B if B=R and
           < R*G*(B+1) if B < R (and different from 61).  If c > R*G*B, then
           some grey may be added to the color cube.  You can use the
           PrintInfo Colors [1] command to get information on your fvwm colors
           setting.  In particular, this command prints the palette used by
           fvwm in rgb format (the last integer gives the number of times fvwm
           has allocated the colors).

       -L | --strict-color-limit
           If the screen displays 256 colors (or less) and has a dynamic
           visual, causes fvwm to use its palette for all the colors.  By
           default, the palette is used only for images and gradients.

       -P | --visual-palette
           If the screen displays 256 colors (or less) and has a dynamic
           visual, this option causes fvwm to use a palette designed for
           limiting the "visual" color distance between the points of the
           palette.  Moreover, for better color sharing, if possible colors
           with a name in the X rgb data base are used for defining the colors
           (with the hope that applications and images prefer to use named
           colors).  If the -l option is not used this palette has 61 colors.
           This palette is also automatically selected if 61 or 9 is used as
           argument to the -l option.

       -A | --allocate-palette
           If the screen displays 256 colors (or less) and has a dynamic
           visual this option causes fvwm to allocate all the colors of its
           palette at start up for reserving these colors for future use.
           This option forces the -static-palette option.  By default, fvwm
           allocates (reserves) a color in its palette only if it needs this
           color.

       -S | --static-palette
           If the screen displays 256 colors (or less) and has a dynamic
           visual this option causes fvwm to never free the colors in its
           palette.  By default, when fvwm does not need a color any more it
           frees this color so that a new color can be used.  This option may
           speed up image loading and save a few bits of memory.

       -blackout
           This option is provided for backward compatibility only.  Blacking
           out the screen during startup is not necessary (and doesn't work)
           anymore.  This option will be removed in the future.

       --debug-stack-ring
           Enables stack ring debugging.  This option is only intended for
           internal debugging and should only be used by developers.

ANATOMY OF A WINDOW
       Fvwm puts a decorative border around most windows.  This border
       consists of a bar on each side and a small L-shaped section on each
       corner.  There is an additional top bar called the title-bar which is
       used to display the name of the window.  In addition, there are up to
       10 title-bar buttons.  The top, side, and bottom bars are collectively
       known as the side-bars.  The corner pieces are called the frame.

       With the built-in minimal configuration, dragging mouse button 1 in the
       frame or side-bars begins a resize operation on the window.  Dragging
       mouse button 2 in the frame or side-bars begins a move operation.
       There are raise/lower operations bound to a single clicking on borders.
       Similarly for the window title.

       Up to ten title-bar buttons may exist.  Their use is completely user
       definable.  One popular configuration uses one button on the left that
       is used to bring up a list of window options and two buttons on the
       right used to iconify and maximize the window.  Another popular
       configuration adds a close button to the right.  The number of
       title-bar buttons used depends on which ones have mouse actions bound
       to them.  See the Mouse command.

THE VIRTUAL DESKTOP
       Fvwm provides multiple virtual desktops for users who wish to use them.
       The screen is a viewport onto a desktop which may be larger than the
       screen.  Several distinct desktops can be accessed (concept: one
       desktop for each project, or one desktop for each application, when
       view applications are distinct).  Since each desktop can be larger than
       the physical screen, divided into m by n pages which are each the size
       of the physical screen, windows which are larger than the screen or
       large groups of related windows can easily be viewed.

       The (m by n) size (i.e. number of pages) of the virtual desktops can be
       changed any time, by using the DesktopSize command.  All virtual
       desktops must be (are) the same size.  The total number of distinct
       desktops does not need to be specified, but is limited to approximately
       4 billion total.  All windows on a range of desktops can be viewed in
       the FvwmPager, a miniature view of the desktops.  The pager is an
       accessory program, called a module, which is not essential for the
       window manager to operate.  Windows may also be listed using the
       WindowList command or the FvwmIconMan module.

       Fvwm keeps the windows on the desktop in a layered stacking order; a
       window in a lower layer never obscures a window in a higher layer.  The
       layer of a window can be changed by using the Layer command.  The
       concept of layers is a generalization of the StaysOnTop flag of older
       fvwm versions.  The StaysOnTop and StaysPut Style options are now
       implemented by putting the windows in suitable layers and the
       previously missing StaysOnBottom Style option has been added.

       Sticky windows are windows which transcend the virtual desktop by
       "Sticking to the screen's glass".  They always stay put on the screen.
       This is convenient for things like clocks and xbiffs, so you only need
       to run one such gadget and it always stays with you.  Icons can also be
       made to stick to the glass, if desired.

       Window geometries are specified relative to the current viewport.  That
       is:

           xterm -geometry +0+0

       creates a window in the upper left hand corner of the visible portion
       of the screen.  It is permissible to specify geometries which place
       windows on the virtual desktop, but off the screen.  For example, if
       the visible screen is 1000 by 1000 pixels, and the desktop size is 3x3,
       and the current viewport is at the upper left hand corner of the
       desktop, invoking:

           xterm -geometry +1000+1000

       places a window just off of the lower right hand corner of the screen.
       It can be found by moving the mouse to the lower right hand corner of
       the screen and waiting for it to scroll into view.  A geometry
       specified as something like:

           xterm -geometry -5-5

       places the window's lower right hand corner 5 pixels from the lower
       right corner of the visible portion of the screen.  Not all
       applications support window geometries with negative offsets.  Some
       applications place the window's upper right hand corner 5 pixels above
       and to the left of the upper left hand corner of the screen; others may
       do just plain bizarre things.

       There are several ways to cause a window to map onto a desktop or page
       other than the currently active one.  The geometry technique mentioned
       above (specifying x,y coordinates larger than the physical screen
       size), however, suffers from the limitation of being interpreted
       relative to the current viewport: the window may not consistently
       appear on a specific page, unless you always invoke the application
       from the same page.

       A better way to place windows on a different page, screen or desk from
       the currently mapped viewport is to use the StartsOnPage or
       StartsOnScreen style specification (the successors to the older
       StartsOnDesk style) in your config file.  The placement is consistent:
       it does not depend on your current location on the virtual desktop.

       Some applications that understand standard Xt command line arguments
       and X resources, like xterm and xfontsel, allow the user to specify the
       start-up desk or page on the command line:

           xterm -xrm "*Desk:1"

       starts an xterm on desk number 1;

           xterm -xrm "*Page:3 2 1"

       starts an xterm two pages to the right and one down from the upper left
       hand page of desk number 3.  Not all applications understand the use of
       these options, however.  You could achieve the same results with the
       following lines in your .Xdefaults file:

           XTerm*Desk: 1

       or

           XTerm*Page: 3 2 1

USE ON MULTI-SCREEN DISPLAYS
       If the -s command line argument is not given, fvwm automatically starts
       up on every screen on the specified display.  After fvwm starts each
       screen is treated independently.  Restarts of fvwm need to be performed
       separately on each screen.  The use of

           EdgeScroll 0 0

       is strongly recommended for multi-screen displays.  You may need to
       quit on each screen to quit from the X session completely.  This is not
       to be confused with Xinerama support.

XINERAMA SUPPORT
       Fvwm supports the Xinerama extension of newer X servers which is
       similar to multi head support (multiple screens) but allows one to move
       windows between screens.  If Xinerama support has been compiled into
       fvwm, it is used whenever fvwm runs on an X server that supports and
       uses multiple screens via Xinerama.  Without this option, the whole
       desktop is treated as one big screen.  For example, menus might pop up
       right between two screens.  The EdgeResistance option of the Style
       command command allows for specifying an explicit resistance value for
       moving windows over the screen edge between two Xinerama screens.
       Xinerama support can be enabled or disabled on the fly or from the
       configuration file with the Xinerama command.  Many modules and
       commands work nicely with Xinerama displays.

       Whenever a geometry in the usual X format can be supplied, fvwm's
       Xinerama extension allows for specifying a screen in addition to the
       geometry (or even the screen alone).  To do this, a '@' is added to the
       end of the geometry string followed by either the screen number or a
       letter.  A number is taken as the number of the Xinerama screen to be
       used (as configured in the X server).  The letter can be one of 'g' for
       the global screen (the rectangle that encloses all Xinerama screens),
       'p' for the primary screen (see below), 'c' for the current screen (the
       one that currently contains the pointer).  If the X server does not
       support Xinerama or only one screen is used, the screen bit is ignored.

           Style * IconBox 64x300-0-0@p

       Xinerama support can be configured to use a primary screen.  Fvwm can
       be configured to place new windows and icons on this screen.  The
       primary screen is screen 0 by default but can be changed with the
       XineramaPrimaryScreen command.

       Xinerama support was designed to work out of the box with the same
       configuration file that would work on a single screen.  It may not
       perform very well if the involved screens use different screen
       resolutions.  In this situation, windows may get stuck in the portion
       of the whole desktop that belongs to neither screen.  When this
       happens, the windows or icons can be retrieved with the command

           All MoveToScreen

       that can be entered in an FvwmConsole window or with FvwmCommand.

       For multi-screen implementations other than Xinerama, such as Single
       Logical Screen, it is possible to simulate a Xinerama configuration if
       the total screen seen by fvwm is made up of equal sized monitors in a
       rectangular grid.  The commands XineramaSls, XineramaSlsSize and
       XineramaSlsScreens are used to configure this feature.

INITIALIZATION
       During initialization, fvwm searches for a configuration file which
       describes key and button bindings, and many other things.  The format
       of these files is described later.  Fvwm first searches for
       configuration files using the command

           Read config

       This looks for file config in $FVWM_USERDIR and $FVWM_DATADIR
       directories, as described in Read.  If this fails more files are
       queried for backward compatibility.  Here is the complete list of all
       file locations queried in the default installation (only the first
       found file is used):

           $HOME/.fvwm/config
           /usr/local/share/fvwm/config

           $HOME/.fvwm/.fvwm2rc
           $HOME/.fvwm2rc
           /usr/local/share/fvwm/.fvwm2rc
           /usr/local/share/fvwm/system.fvwm2rc
           /etc/system.fvwm2rc

       Please note, the last 5 locations are not guaranteed to be supported in
       the future.

       If a configuration file is not found, the left mouse button, or Help or
       F1 keys on the root window bring up menus and forms that can create a
       starting configuration file.

       Fvwm sets two environment variables which are inherited by its
       children.  These are $DISPLAY which describes the display on which fvwm
       is running.  $DISPLAY may be unix:0.0 or :0.0, which doesn't work too
       well when passed through ssh to another machine, so $HOSTDISPLAY is set
       to a network-ready description of the display.  $HOSTDISPLAY always
       uses the TCP/IP transport protocol (even for a local connection) so
       $DISPLAY should be used for local connections, as it may use
       Unix-domain sockets, which are faster.

       If you want to start some applications or modules with fvwm, you can
       simply put

           Exec app

       or

           Module FvwmXxx

       into your config, but it is not recommended; do this only if you know
       what you are doing.  It is usually important to start applications or
       modules after the entire config is read, because it contains styles or
       module configurations which can affect window appearance and
       functionality.

       The standard way to start applications or modules on fvwm's start up is
       to add them to an initialization function (usually StartFunction or
       InitFunction).  This way they are only started after fvwm finishes to
       read and execute config file.

       Fvwm has three special functions for initialization: StartFunction,
       which is executed on startups and restarts; InitFunction and
       RestartFunction, which are executed during initialization and restarts
       (respectively) just after StartFunction.  These functions may be
       customized in a user's config file using the AddToFunc command
       (described later) to start up modules, xterms, or whatever you'd like
       to have started by fvwm.

       Fvwm has also a special exit function: ExitFunction, executed when
       exiting or restarting before actually quitting.  It could be used to
       explicitly kill modules, etc.

       If fvwm is run under a session manager, functions SessionInitFunction
       and SessionRestartFunction are executed instead of InitFunction and
       RestartFunction.  This helps to define the user's config file to be
       good for both running under a session manager and without it.
       Generally it is a bad idea to start xterms or other applications in
       "Session*" functions.  Also someone can decide to start different
       modules while running under a session manager or not.  For the similar
       purposes SessionExitFunction is used instead of ExitFunction.

           DestroyFunc StartFunction
           AddToFunc StartFunction
            + I Module FvwmPager * *
            + I Module FvwmButtons

           DestroyFunc InitFunction
           AddToFunc InitFunction
            + I Module FvwmBanner
            + I Module FvwmIconMan
            + I Exec xsetroot -solid cyan
            + I Exec xterm
            + I Exec netscape

           DestroyFunc RestartFunction
           AddToFunc RestartFunction
            + I Module FvwmIconMan

           DestroyFunc SessionInitFunction
           AddToFunc SessionInitFunction
            + I Module FvwmBanner

           DestroyFunc SessionRestartFunction
           AddToFunc SessionRestartFunction
            + I Nop

       You do not need to define all special functions if some are empty.
       Also note, all these special functions may be emulated now using
       StartFunction and ExitFunction, like this:

           DestroyFunc StartFunction
           AddToFunc StartFunction
           + I Test (Init) Module FvwmBanner
           + I Module FvwmPager * *
           + I Test (Restart) Beep

           DestroyFunc ExitFunction
           AddToFunc ExitFunction
           + I Test (Quit) Echo Bye-bye
           + I KillModule MyBuggyModule
           + I Test (ToRestart) Beep

COMPILATION OPTIONS
       Fvwm has a number of compile-time options.  If you have trouble using a
       certain command or feature, check to see if support for it was included
       at compile time.  Optional features are described in the config.h file
       that is generated during compilation.

ICONS AND IMAGES
       Fvwm can load .xbm, .xpm, .png and .svg images.  XBM images are
       monochrome.  Fvwm can always display XBM files.  XPM and PNG formats
       are color images.  SVG is a vector graphics image format.  Compile-time
       options determine whether fvwm can display XPM, PNG or SVG icons and
       images.  See the INSTALL.fvwm file for more information.

       The related SHAPE compile-time option can make fvwm display spiffy
       shaped icons.

   SVG rendering options
       SVG images are generated from (XML) text files.  A really simple SVG
       file might look something like this:

           <svg width="120" height="80">
                <rect fill="red"     width="40" height="40"  x="0"   y="0"  />
                <rect fill="lime"    width="40" height="40"  x="40"  y="0"  />
                <rect fill="blue"    width="40" height="40"  x="80"  y="0"  />
                <rect fill="cyan"    width="40" height="40"  x="0"   y="40" />
                <rect fill="magenta" width="40" height="40"  x="40"  y="40" />
                <rect fill="yellow"  width="40" height="40"  x="80"  y="40" />
           </svg>

       By default, SVG images are rendered as the image creator intended them
       to.  But since SVG is a vector graphics format, the images can be
       rendered at any chosen size and rotation, e.g. making it possible to
       use the same icon file rendered at different sizes for the Icon and
       MiniIcon styles.

       The rendering options are specified as a string appended to the SVG
       filename as follows:

       image.svg:[!] [(1) size] [(2) position] [(3) rotation] [(4) scale] ...

       (1) [-]width{x}[-]height
       (2) {- | +}xpos{- | +}ypos
       (3) @[-]angle
       (4) {* | /}[-]factor[x | y]

       The option string always starts with a colon (':') to separate it from
       the filename.  An empty option string can skip this colon, but it might
       still be a good idea to include it to prevent ambiguity if the filename
       contains any colon.

           filename_without_colon.svg
           filename:with:colon.svg:

       An exclamation point ('!') transposes the entire final image (including
       the rendering area), i.e. all the horizontal and all the vertical
       coordinates are swapped with each other.

           image.svg:!

       width and height specifies the dimensions of the rendering area in
       pixels, i.e. the dimensions of the resulting image.  The actual image
       is fitted to fill the entire rendering area.

           image.svg:60x60

       Use a width or height value of 0 to keep the aspect ratio.

           image.svg:0x60
           image.svg:60x0

       A '-' before width mirrors the rendering area horizontally.

           image.svg:-0x0

       A '-' before height mirrors the rendering area vertically.

           image.svg:0x-0

       xpos and ypos specifies a translation of the image in pixels.  A
       positive xpos value moves the image to the right.  A positive ypos
       value moves it down.  Moving it partially outside of the rendering area
       results in a cropped image.

           image.svg:-30-0
           image.svg:-0+10
           image.svg:-30+10

       angle specifies a rotation around the actual image center in degrees.
       This might result in a cropped image.  A positive value rotates the
       image clockwise.  Floating point values are recognized.

           image.svg:@180
           image.svg:@-90
           image.svg:@30
           image.svg:@57.3

       factor specifes a scaling of the actual image (not the rendering area).
       Scaling it up results in a cropped image.  Floating point values are
       recognized.  Division by zero is ignored.  If factor is directly
       followed by a 'x' or a 'y', the scaling is horizontal or vertical
       respectively.  Otherwise the scaling is uniform.

           image.svg:*2
           image.svg:/2
           image.svg:/3x
           image.svg:/2y

       Scaling down a translated or rotated image can prevent cropping.

           image.svg:@30*0.6

       Repeated usage of translation, rotation, and scaling is allowed.
       Translation and rotation are additive.  Scaling is multiplicative.

           image.svg:*2/3
           image.svg:/3x/2y

       When combining affine transformations, the scaling is always done
       first, then the rotation, and finally the translation.

           image.svg:-30+10@30/3x/2y

       Use a negative scale factor to mirror the actual image.

           image.svg:-30+10@30/-3x/2y

       Mirroring of the rendering area is done after any scaling, rotation or
       translation of the image.

           image.svg:-0x0-30+10@30/3x/2y

       Transposing is done last of all, after everything else.

           image.svg:!-0x0-30+10@30/3x/2y

MODULES
       A module is a separate program which runs as a separate Unix process
       but transmits commands to fvwm to execute.  Users can write their own
       modules to do any weird or bizarre manipulations without bloating or
       affecting the integrity of fvwm itself.

       Modules must be spawned by fvwm so that it can set up two pipes for
       fvwm and the module to communicate with.  The pipes are already open
       for the module when it starts and the file descriptors for the pipes
       are provided as command line arguments.

       Modules can be spawned by fvwm at any time during the X session by use
       of the Module command.  Modules can exist for the duration of the X
       session, or can perform a single task and exit.  If the module is still
       active when fvwm is told to quit, then fvwm closes the communication
       pipes and waits to receive a SIGCHLD from the module, indicating that
       it has detected the pipe closure and has exited.  If modules fail to
       detect the pipe closure fvwm exits after approximately 30 seconds
       anyway.  The number of simultaneously executing modules is limited by
       the operating system's maximum number of simultaneously open files,
       usually between 60 and 256.

       Modules simply transmit commands to the fvwm command engine.  Commands
       are formatted just as in the case of a mouse binding in the config
       setup file.  Certain auxiliary information is also transmitted, as in
       the sample module FvwmButtons.

       Please refer to the Module Commands section for details.

ICCCM COMPLIANCE
       Fvwm attempts to be ICCCM 2.0 compliant.  Check
       http://tronche.com/gui/x/icccm/ for more info.  In addition, ICCCM
       states that it should be possible for applications to receive any
       keystroke, which is not consistent with the keyboard shortcut approach
       used in fvwm and most other window managers.  In particular you cannot
       have the same keyboard shortcuts working with your fvwm and another
       fvwm running within Xnest (a nested X server running in a window).  The
       same problem exists with mouse bindings.

       The ICCCM states that windows possessing the property

           WM_HINTS(WM_HINTS):
               Client accepts input or input focus: False

       should not be given the keyboard input focus by the window manager.
       These windows can take the input focus by themselves, however.  A
       number of applications set this property, and yet expect the window
       manager to give them the keyboard focus anyway, so fvwm provides a
       window style, Lenience, which allows fvwm to overlook this ICCCM rule.
       Even with this window style it is not guaranteed that the application
       accepts focus.

       The differences between ICCCM 1.1 and 2.0 include the ability to take
       over from a running ICCCM 2.0 compliant window manager; thus

           fvwm; vi ~/.fvwm/config; fvwm -replace

       resembles the Restart command.  It is not exactly the same, since
       killing the previously running wm may terminate your X session, if the
       wm was started as the last client in your .Xclients or .Xsession file.

       Further additions are support for client-side colormap installation
       (see the ICCCM for details) and the urgency hint.  Clients can set this
       hint in the WM_HINTS property of their window and expect the window
       manager to attract the user's attention to the window.  Fvwm has two
       re-definable functions for this purpose, "UrgencyFunc" and
       "UrgencyDoneFunc", which are executed when the flag is set/cleared.
       Their default definitions are:

           AddToFunc UrgencyFunc
            + I Iconify off
            + I FlipFocus
            + I Raise
            + I WarpToWindow !raise 5p 5p
           AddToFunc UrgencyDoneFunc
            + I Nop

GNOME COMPLIANCE
       Fvwm attempts to be GNOME (version 1) compliant.  Check
       http://www.gnome.org for what that may mean.  To disable GNOME hints
       for some or all windows, the GNOMEIgnoreHints style can be used.

EXTENDED WINDOW MANAGER HINTS
       Fvwm attempts to respect the extended window manager hints (ewmh or
       EWMH for short) specification:
       http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Standards_2fwm_2dspec and some
       extensions of this specification.  This allows fvwm to work with KDE
       version >= 2, GNOME version 2 and other applications which respect this
       specification (any application based on GTK+ version 2).  Applications
       which respect this specification are called ewmh compliant
       applications.

       This support is configurable with styles and commands.  These styles
       and commands have EWMH as the prefix (so you can find them easily in
       this man page).

       There is a new Context 'D' for the Key, PointerKey, Mouse and Stroke
       commands.  This context is for desktop applications (such as kdesktop
       and Nautilus desktop).

       When a compliant taskbar asks fvwm to activate a window (typically when
       you click on a button which represents a window in such a taskbar),
       then fvwm calls the complex function EWMHActivateWindowFunc which by
       default is Iconify Off, Focus and Raise.  You can redefine this
       function.  For example:

           DestroyFunc EWMHActivateWindowFunc
           AddToFunc EWMHActivateWindowFunc I Iconify Off
           + I Focus
           + I Raise
           + I WarpToWindow 50 50

       additionally warps the pointer to the center of the window.

       The EWMH specification introduces the notion of Working Area.  Without
       ewmh support the Working Area is the full visible screen (or all your
       screens if you have a multi head setup and you use Xinerama).  However,
       compliant applications (such as a panel) can ask to reserve space at
       the edge of the screen.  If this is the case, the Working Area is your
       full visible screen minus these reserved spaces.  If a panel can be
       hidden by clicking on a button the Working Area does not change (as you
       can unhide the panel at any time), but the Dynamic Working Area is
       updated: the space reserved by the panel is removed (and added again if
       you pop up the panel).  The Dynamic Working Area may be used when fvwm
       places or maximizes a window.  To know if an application reserves space
       you can type "xprop | grep _NET_WM_STRUT" in a terminal and select the
       application.  If four numbers appear then these numbers define the
       reserved space as explained in the EwmhBaseStruts command.

MWM COMPATIBILITY
       Fvwm provides options to emulate Motif Window Manager (Mwm) as well as
       possible.  Please refer to the Emulate command as well as to the Mwm
       specific options of the Style and MenuStyle commands for details.

OPEN LOOK AND XVIEW COMPATIBILITY
       Fvwm supports all the Open Look decoration hints (except pushpins).
       Should you use any such application, please add the following line to
       your config:

           Style * OLDecor

       Most (perhaps all) Open Look applications have a strange notion of
       keyboard focus handling.  Although a lot of work went into fvwm to work
       well with these, you may still encounter problems.  It is recommended
       to use the NeverFocus focus policy and the Lenience style for all such
       applications (the windows still get the focus):

           Style <application name> NeverFocus, Lenience

       But in case you can not live with that focus policy, you can try using
       one of the other focus policies in combination with the Lenience style:

           Style <application name> MouseFocus, Lenience
           Style <application name> SloppyFocus, Lenience
           Style <application name> ClickToFocus, Lenience

M4 PREPROCESSING
       M4 pre-processing is handled by a module in fvwm.  To get more details,
       try man FvwmM4.  In short, if you want fvwm to parse your files with
       m4, then replace the command Read with FvwmM4 in your ~/.fvwm/config
       file (if it appears at all), and start fvwm with the command

           fvwm -cmd "FvwmM4 config"

CPP PREPROCESSING
       Cpp is the C-language pre-processor.  fvwm offers cpp processing which
       mirrors the m4 pre-processing.  To find out about it, re-read the M4
       section, but replace "m4" with "cpp".

CONFIGURATION
   Configuration Files
       The configuration file is used to describe mouse and button bindings,
       colors, the virtual display size, and related items.  The
       initialization configuration file is typically called config (or
       .fvwm2rc).  By using the Read command, it is easy to read in new
       configuration files as you go.

       Lines beginning with '#' are ignored by fvwm.  Lines starting with '*'
       are expected to contain module configuration commands (rather than
       configuration commands for fvwm itself).  Like in shell scripts
       embedded newlines in a configuration file line can be quoted by
       preceding them with a backslash.  All lines linked in this fashion are
       treated as a single line.  The newline itself is ignored.

       Fvwm makes no distinction between configuration commands and action
       commands, so anything mentioned in the fvwm commands section can be
       placed on a line by itself for fvwm to execute as it reads the
       configuration file, or it can be placed as an executable command in a
       menu or bound to a mouse button or a keyboard key.  It is left as an
       exercise for the user to decide which function make sense for
       initialization and which ones make sense for run-time.

   Supplied Configuration
       A sample configuration file, is supplied with the fvwm distribution.
       It is well commented and can be used as a source of examples for fvwm
       configuration.  It may be copied from /usr/local/share/fvwm/config
       file.

       Alternatively, the built-in menu (accessible when no configuration file
       is found) has options to create an initial config file for the user.

FONTS
   Font names and font loading
       The fonts used for the text of a window title, icon titles, menus and
       geometry window can be specified by using the Font and IconFont Style,
       the Font MenuStyle and the DefaultFont commands.  Also, all the Modules
       which use text have configuration command(s) to specify font(s).  All
       these styles and commands take a font name as an argument.  This
       section explains what is a font name for fvwm and which fonts fvwm
       loads.

       First, you can use what we can call a usual font name, for example,

           -adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--10-100-75-75-m-60-ISO8859-1
           -adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--10-*
           -*-fixed-medium-o-normal--14-*-ISO8859-15

       That is, you can use an X Logical Font Description (XLFD for short).
       Then the "first" font which matches the description is loaded and used.
       This "first" font depends of your font path and also of your locale.
       Fonts which match the locale charset are loaded in priority order.  For
       example with

           -adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--10-*

       if the locale charset is ISO8859-1, then fvwm tries to load a font
       which matches

           -adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--10-*-ISO8859-1

       with the locale charset ISO8859-15 fvwm tries to load

           -adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--10-*-ISO8859-15.

       A font name can be given as an extended XLFD.  This is a comma
       separated list of (simple) XLFD font names, for example:

           -adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--14-*,-*-courier-medium-r-normal--14-*

       Each simple font name is tried until a matching font with the locale
       charset is found and if this fails each simple font name is tried
       without constraint on the charset.

       More details on the XLFD can be found in the X manual page, the X
       Logical Font Description Conventions document (called xlfd) and the
       XLoadFont and XCreateFontSet manual pages.  Some useful font utilities
       are: xlsfonts, xfontsel, xfd and xset.

       If you have Xft support you can specify an Xft font name (description)
       of a true type (or Type1) font prefixed by "xft:", for example:

           "xft:Luxi Mono"
           "xft:Luxi Mono:Medium:Roman:size=14:encoding=iso8859-1"

       The "first" font which matches the description is loaded.  This first
       font depends on the XftConfig configuration file with Xft1 and on the
       /etc/fonts/fonts.conf file with Xft2.  One may read the Xft manual page
       and the fontconfig man page with Xft2.  The first string which follows
       "xft:" is always considered as the family.  With the second example
       Luxi Mono is the Family (Other XFree TTF families: "Luxi Serif", "Luxi
       Sans"), Medium is the Weight (other possible weights: Light, DemiBold,
       Bold, Black), Roman is the slant or the style (other possibilities:
       Regular, Oblique, Italic) size specifies the point size (for a pixel
       size use pixelsize=), encoding allows for enforce a charset (iso8859-1
       or iso10646-1 only; if no encoding is given the locale charset is
       assumed).  An important parameter is "minspace=bool" where bool is True
       or False.  If bool is False (the default?) Xft gives a greater font
       height to fvwm than if bool is True.  This may modify text placement,
       icon and window title height, line spacing in menus and FvwmIdent,
       button height in some fvwm modules ...etc.  With a LCD monitor you may
       try to add "rgba=mode" where mode is either rgb, bgr, vrgb or vbgr to
       enable subpixel rendering.  The best mode depends on the way your LCD
       cells are arranged.  You can pass other specifications in between ":",
       as "foundry=foundry_name", "spacing=type" where type can be monospace,
       proportional or charcell, "charwidth=integer", "charheight=integer" or
       "antialias=bool" where bool is True or False.  It seems that these
       parameters are not always taken in account.

       To determine which Xft fonts are really loaded you can export
       XFT_DEBUG=1 before starting fvwm and take a look to the error log.
       With Xft2 you may use fc-list to list the available fonts.  Anyway, Xft
       support is experimental (from the X and the fvwm point of view) and the
       quality of the rendering depends on number of parameters (the XFree and
       the freetype versions and your video card(s)).

       After an Xft font name you can add after a ";" an XLFD font name
       (simple or extended) as:

           xft:Verdana:pixelsize=14;-adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--14-*

       then, if either loading the Xft font fails or fvwm has no Xft support,
       fvwm loads the font "-adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--14-*".  This allows
       for writing portable configuration files.

   Font and string encoding
       Once a font is loaded, fvwm finds its encoding (or charset) using its
       name (the last two fields of the name).  fvwm assumes that the strings
       which are displayed with this font use this encoding (an exception is
       that if an iso10646-1 font is loaded, then UTF-8 is assumed for string
       encoding).  In a normal situation, (i) a font is loaded by giving a
       font name without specifying the encoding, (ii) the encoding of the
       loaded font is the locale encoding, and then (iii) the strings in the
       fvwm configuration files should use the locale encoding as well as the
       window and icon name.  With Xft the situation is bit different as Xft
       supports only iso10646-1 and iso8859-1.  If you do not specify one of
       these encodings in the Xft font name, then fvwm does strings conversion
       using (iii).  Note that with multibyte fonts (and in particular with
       "CJK" fonts) for good text rendering, the locale encoding should be the
       charset of the font.

       To override the previous rules, it is possible to specify the string
       encoding in the beginning of a font description as follow:

           StringEncoding=enc:_full_font_name_

       where enc is an encoding supported by fvwm (usually font name charset
       plus some unicode encodings: UTF-8, USC-2, USC-4 and UTF-16).

       For example, you may use an iso8859-1 locale charset and have an
       FvwmForm in Russian using koi8-r encoding.  In this case, you just have
       to ask FvwmForm to load a koi8-r font by specifying the encoding in the
       font name.  With a multibyte language, (as multibyte font works well
       only if the locale encoding is the charset of the font), you should use
       an iso10646-1 font:

           StringEncoding=jisx0208.1983-0:-*-fixed-medium-r-*-ja-*-iso10646-1

       or

           "StringEncoding=jisx0208.1983-0:xft:Bitstream Cyberbit"

       if your FvwmForm configuration uses jisx0208.1983-0 encoding.  Another
       possibility is to use UTF-8 encoding for your FvwmForm configuration
       and use an iso10646-1 font:

           -*-fixed-medium-r-*-ja-*-iso10646-1

       or

           "StringEncoding=UTF-8:xft:Bitstream Cyberbit"

       or equivalently

           "xft:Bitstream Cyberbit:encoding=iso10646-1"

       In general iso10646-1 fonts together with UTF-8 string encoding allows
       the display of any characters in a given menu, FvwmForm etc.

       More and more, unicode is used and text files use UTF-8 encoding.
       However, in practice the characters used range over your locale charset
       (this is the case when you generate a menu with fvwm-menu-desktop with
       recent versions of KDE and GNOME).  For saving memory (an iso10646-1
       font may have a very large number of characters) or because you have a
       pretty font without an iso10646-1 charset, you can specify the string
       encoding to be UTF-8 and use a font in the locale charset:

           StringEncoding=UTF-8:-*-pretty_font-*-12-*

       In most cases, fvwm correctly determines the encoding of the font.
       However, some fonts do not end with valid encoding names.  When the
       font name isn't normal, for example:

           -misc-fixed-*--20-*-my_utf8-36

       you need to add the encoding after the font name using a slash as a
       delimiter.  For example:

           MenuStyle * Font -misc-fixed-*--20-*-my_utf8-36/iso10646-1

       If fvwm finds an encoding, fvwm uses the iconv system functions to do
       conversion between encodings.  Unfortunately, there are no standards.
       For conversion between iso8859-1 and UTF-8: a GNU system uses
       "ISO-8859-1" and other systems use "iso881" to define the converters
       (these two names are supported by fvwm).  Moreover, in some cases it
       may be necessary to use machine specific converters.  So, if you
       experience problems you can try to get information on your iconv
       implementation ("man iconv" may help) and put the name which defines
       the converter between the font encoding and UTF-8 at the end of the
       font name after the encoding hint and a / (another possible solution is
       to use GNU libiconv).  For example use:

           Style * Font -misc-fixed-*--14-*-iso8859-1/*/latin1

       to use latin1 for defining the converter for the iso8859-1 encoding.
       The "*" in between the "/" says to fvwm to determine the encoding from
       the end of the font name.  Use:

           Style * Font \
                -misc-fixed-*--14-*-local8859-6/iso8859-6/local_iso8859_6_iconv

       to force fvwm to use the font with iso8859-6 as the encoding (this is
       useful for bi-directionality) and to use local_iso8859_6_iconv for
       defining the converters.

   Font Shadow Effects
       Fonts can be given 3d effects.  At the beginning of the font name (or
       just after a possible StringEncoding specification) add

           Shadow=size [offset] [directions]]:

       size is a positive integer which specifies the number of pixels of
       shadow.  offset is an optional positive integer which defines the
       number of pixels to offset the shadow from the edge of the character.
       The default offset is zero.  directions is an optional set of
       directions the shadow emanates from the character.  The directions are
       a space separated list of fvwm directions:

       N, North, Top, t, Up, u, -

       E, East, Right, r, Right, r, ]

       S, South, Bottom, b, Down, d, _

       W, West, Left, l, Left, l, [

       NE, NorthEast, TopRight, tr, UpRight, ur, ^

       SE, SouthEast, BottomRight, br, DownRight, dr, >

       SW, SouthWest, BottomLeft, bl, DownLeft, dl, v

       NW, NorthWest, TopLeft, tl, UpLeft, ul, <

       C, Center, Centre, .

       A shadow is displayed in each given direction.  All is equivalent to
       all the directions.  The default direction is BottomRight.  With the
       Center direction, the shadow surrounds the whole string.  Since this is
       a super set of all other directions, it is a waste of time to specify
       this along with any other directions.

       The shadow effect only works with colorsets.  The color of the shadow
       is defined by using the fgsh option of the Colorset command.  Please
       refer to the Colorsets section for details about colorsets.

       Note: It can be difficult to find the font, fg, fgsh and bg colors to
       make this effect look good, but it can look quite good.

BI-DIRECTIONAL TEXT
       Arabic and Hebrew text require bi-directional text support to be
       displayed correctly, this means that logical strings should be
       converted before their visual presentation, so left-to-right and
       right-to-left sub-strings are determined and reshuffled.  In fvwm this
       is done automatically in window titles, menus, module labels and other
       places if the fonts used for displaying the text are of one of the
       charsets that require bidi (bi-directional) support.  For example, this
       includes iso8859-6, iso8859-8 and iso10646-1 (unicode), but not other
       iso8859-* fonts.

       This bi-directional text support is done using the fribidi library
       compile time option, see INSTALL.fvwm.

KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
       Almost all window manager operations can be performed from the keyboard
       so mouse-less operation should be possible.  In addition to scrolling
       around the virtual desktop by binding the Scroll command to appropriate
       keys, Popup, Move, Resize, and any other command can be bound to keys.
       Once a command is started the pointer is moved by using the up, down,
       left, and right arrows, and the action is terminated by pressing
       return.  Holding down the Shift key causes the pointer movement to go
       in larger steps and holding down the control key causes the pointer
       movement to go in smaller steps.  Standard emacs and vi cursor movement
       controls ( n , p , f , b , and j , k , h , l ) can be used instead of
       the arrow keys.

SESSION MANAGEMENT
       Fvwm supports session management according to the X Session Management
       Protocol.  It saves and restores window position, size, stacking order,
       desk, stickiness, shadiness, maximizedness, iconifiedness for all
       windows.  Furthermore, some global state is saved.

       Fvwm doesn't save any information regarding styles, decors, functions
       or menus.  If you change any of these resources during a session (e.g.
       by issuing Style commands or by using various modules), these changes
       are lost after saving and restarting the session.  To become permanent,
       such changes have to be added to the configuration file.

       Note further that the current implementation has the following anomaly
       when used on a multi-screen display: Starting fvwm for the first time,
       fvwm manages all screens by forking a copy of itself for each screen.
       Every copy knows its parent and issuing a Quit command to any instance
       of fvwm kills the master and thus all copies of fvwm.  When you save
       and restart the session, the session manager brings up a copy of fvwm
       on each screen, but this time they are started as individual instances
       managing one screen only.  Thus a Quit kills only the copy it was sent
       to.  This is probably not a very serious problem, since with session
       management, you are supposed to quit a session through the session
       manager anyway.  If it is really needed,

           Exec exec killall fvwm

       still kills all copies of fvwm.  Your system must have the killall
       command though.

BOOLEAN ARGUMENTS
       A number of commands take one or several boolean arguments.  These take
       a few equivalent inputs: "yes", "on", "true", "t" and "y" all evaluate
       to true while "no", "off", "false", "f" and "n" evaluate to false.
       Some commands allow "toggle" too which means that the feature is
       disabled if it is currently enabled and vice versa.

BUILTIN KEY AND MOUSE BINDINGS
       The following commands are built-in to fvwm:

           Key Help R A Popup MenuFvwmRoot
           Key F1 R A Popup MenuFvwmRoot
           Key Tab A M WindowList Root c c NoDeskSort
           Key Escape A MC EscapeFunc
           Mouse 1 R A Menu MenuFvwmRoot
           Mouse 1 T   A FuncFvwmRaiseLowerX Move
           Mouse 1 FS  A FuncFvwmRaiseLowerX Resize
           Mouse 2 FST A FuncFvwmRaiseLowerX Move
           AddToFunc FuncFvwmRaiseLowerX
           + I Raise
           + M $0
           + D Lower

       The Help and F1 keys invoke a built-in menu that fvwm creates.  This is
       primarily for new users that have not created their own configuration
       file.  Either key on the root (background) window pops up an menu to
       help you get started.

       The Tab key pressed anywhere with the Meta key (same as the Alt key on
       PC keyboards) held down pop-ups a window list.

       Mouse button 1 on the title-bar or side frame can move, raise or lower
       a window.

       Mouse button 1 on the window corners can resize, raise or lower a
       window.

       You can override or remove these bindings.  To remove the window list
       binding, use this:

           Key Tab A M -

COMMAND EXECUTION
   Module and Function Commands
       If fvwm encounters a command that it doesn't recognize, it checks to
       see if the specified command should have been

           Function (rest of command)

       or

           Module (rest of command)

       This allows complex functions or modules to be invoked in a manner
       which is fairly transparent to the configuration file.

       Example: the config file contains the line

           HelpMe

       Fvwm looks for an fvwm command called "HelpMe", and fails.  Next it
       looks for a user-defined complex function called "HelpMe".  If no such
       function exists, fvwm tries to execute a module called "HelpMe".

   Delayed Execution of Commands
       Note: There are many commands that affect look and feel of specific,
       some or all windows, like Style, Mouse, Colorset, TitleStyle and many
       others.  For performance reasons such changes are not applied
       immediately but only when fvwm is idle, i.e. no user interaction or
       module input is pending.  Specifically, new Style options that are set
       in a function are not applied until after the function has completed.
       This can sometimes lead to unwanted effects.

       To force that all pending changes are applied immediately, use the
       UpdateStyles, Refresh or RefreshWindow commands.

QUOTING
       Quotes are required only when needed to make fvwm consider two or more
       words to be a single argument.  Unnecessary quoting is allowed.  If you
       want a quote character in your text, you must escape it by using the
       backslash character.  For example, if you have a pop-up menu called
       "Window-Ops", then you do not need quotes:

           Popup Window-Ops

       but if you replace the dash with a space, then you need quotes:

           Popup "Window Ops"

       The supported quoting characters are double quotes, single quotes and
       reverse single quotes.  All three kinds of quotes are treated in the
       same way.  Single characters can be quoted with a preceding backslash.
       Quoting single characters works even inside other kinds of quotes.

COMMAND EXPANSION
       Whenever an fvwm command line is executed, fvwm performs parameter
       expansion.  A parameter is a '$' followed by a word enclosed in
       brackets ($[...]) or a single special character.  If fvwm encounters an
       unquoted parameter on the command line it expands it to a string
       indicated by the parameter name.  Unknown parameters are left
       untouched.  Parameter expansion is performed before quoting.  To get a
       literal '$' use "$$".

       If a command is prefixed with a '-' parameter expansion isn't
       performed.  This applies to the command immediately following the '-',
       in which the expansion normally would have taken place.  When uesed
       together with other prefix commands it must be added before the other
       prefix.

       Example:

           Pick -Exec exec xmessage '$[w.name]'

       opens an xmessage dialog with "$[w.name]" unexpanded.

       The longer variables may contain additional variables inside the name,
       which are expanded before the outer variable.

       In earlier versions of fvwm, some single letter variables were
       supported.  It is deprecated now, since they cause a number of
       problems.  You should use the longer substitutes instead.

       Example:

           # Print the current desk number, horizontal page number
           # and the window's class (unexpanded here, no window).
           Echo $[desk.n] $[page.nx] $[w.class]

       Note: If the command is called outside a window context, it prints
       "$[w.class]" instead of the class name.  It is usually not enough to
       have the pointer over a window to have a context window.  To force
       using the window with the focus, the Current command can be used:

           Current Echo $[desk.n] $[page.nx] $[w.class]

       The parameters known by fvwm are:

       $$
           A literal '$'.

       $.
           The absolute directory of the currently Read file.  Intended for
           creating relative and relocatable configuration trees.  If used
           outside of any read file, the returned value is '.'.

       $0 to $9
           The positional parameters given to a complex function (a function
           that has been defined with the AddToFunc command).  "$0" is
           replaced with the first parameter, "$1" with the second parameter
           and so on.  If the corresponding parameter is undefined, the "$..."
           is deleted from the command line.

       $*
           All positional parameters given to a complex function.  This
           includes parameters that follow after "$9".

       $[n]
           The n:th positional parameter given to a complex function, counting
           from 0.  If the corresponding parameter is undefined, the "$[n]" is
           deleted from the command line.  The parameter is expanded unquoted.

       $[n-m]
           The positional parameters given to a complex function, starting
           with parameter n and ending with parameter m.  If all the
           corresponding parameters are undefined, the "$[...]" is deleted
           from the command line.  If only some of the parameters are defined,
           all defined parameters are expanded, and the remaining silently
           ignored.  All parameters are expanded unquoted.

       $[n-]
           All the positional parameters given to a complex function, starting
           with parameter n.  If all the corresponding parameters are
           undefined, the "$[...]" is deleted from the command line.  All
           parameters are expanded unquoted.

       $[*]
           All the positional parameters given to a complex function.  This is
           equivalent of $[0-].

       $[version.num]
           The version number, like "2.6.0".

       $[version.info]
           The version info, like " (from cvs)", empty for the official
           releases.

       $[version.line]
           The first line printed by the --version command line option.

       $[vp.x] $[vp.y] $[vp.width] $[vp.height]
           Either coordinate or the width or height of the current viewport.

       $[wa.x] $[wa.y] $[wa.width] $[wa.height]
           Either coordinate or the width or height of the EWMH working area.

       $[dwa.x] $[dwa.y] $[dwa.width] $[dwa.height]
           Either coordinate or the width or height of the dynamic EWMH
           working area.

       $[desk.n]
           The current desk number.

       $[desk.name<n>]
           These parameters are replaced with the name of the desktop number
           <n> that is defined with the DesktopName command.  If no name is
           defined, then the default name is returned.

       $[desk.width] $[desk.height]
           The width or height of the whole desktop, i.e. the width or height
           multiplied by the number of pages in x or y direction.

       $[desk.pagesx] $[desk.pagesy]
           The number of total pages in a desk in x or y direction.  This is
           the same as the values set by DesktopSize.

       $[page.nx] $[page.ny]
           The current page numbers, by X and Y axes, starting from 0.  page
           is equivalent to area in the GNOME terminology.

       $[w.id]
           The window-id (expressed in hex, e.g. 0x10023c) of the window the
           command was called for or "$[w.id]" if no window is associated with
           the command.

       $[w.name] $[w.iconname] $[w.class] $[w.resource] $[w.visiblename]
       $[w.iconfile] $[w.miniiconfile] $[w.iconfile.svgopts]
       $[w.miniiconfile.svgopts]
           The window's name, icon name, resource class and resource name,
           visible name, file name of its icon or mini icon defined with the
           Icon or MiniIcon style (including the full path if the file was
           found on disk), and (if fvwm is compiled with SVG support) the icon
           or mini icon svg rendering options (including the leading colon),
           or unexpanded "$[w.<attribute>]" string if no window is associated
           with the command.

           Note, the first 5 variables may include any kind of characters, so
           these variables are quoted.  It means that the value is surrounded
           by single quote characters and any contained single quote is
           prefixed with a backslash.  This guarantees that commands like:

               Style $[w.resource] Icon norm/network.png

           work correctly, regardless of any special symbols the value may
           contain, like spaces and different kinds of quotes.

           In the case of the window's visible name, this is the value
           returned from the literal title of the window shown in the
           titlebar.  Typically this will be the same as $[w.name] once
           expanded, although in the case of using IndexedWindowName then this
           is more useful a distinction, and allows for referencing the
           specific window by its visible name for inclusion in things like
           Style commands.

       $[w.x] $[w.y] $[w.width] $[w.height]
           Either coordinate or the width or height of the current window if
           it is not iconified.  If no window is associated with the command
           or the window is iconified, the string is left as is.

       $[w.desk]
           The number of the desk on which the window is shown.  If the window
           is sticky the current desk number is used.

       $[w.layer]
           The layer of the window.

       $[w.screen]
           The screen number the window is on.  If Xinerama is not present,
           this returns the number 0.

       $[cw.x] $[cw.y] $[cw.width] $[cw.height]
           These work like $[w....] but return the geometry of the client part
           of the window.  In other words: the border and title of the window
           is not taken into account.

       $[i.x], $[it.x], $[ip.x] $[i.y], $[it.y], $[ip.y] $[i.width],
       $[it.width], $[ip.width] $[i.height], $[it.height], $[ip.height]
           These work like $[w....] but return the geometry of the icon
           ($[i....]), the icon title ($[it....]) or the icon picture
           ($[ip....]).

       $[pointer.x] $[pointer.y]
           These return the position of the pointer on the screen.  If the
           pointer is not on the screen, these variables are not expanded.

       $[pointer.wx] $[pointer.wy]
           These return the position of the pointer in the selected window.
           If the pointer is not on the screen, the window is iconified or no
           window is selected, these variables are not expanded.

       $[pointer.cx] $[pointer.cy]
           These return the position of the pointer in the client portion of
           the selected window.  If the pointer is not on the screen, the
           window is shaded or iconified or no window is selected, these
           variables are not expanded.

       $[pointer.screen]
           The screen number the pointer is currently on.  Returns 0 if
           Xinerama is not enabled.

       $[screen]
           The screen number fvwm is running on.  Useful for setups with
           multiple screens.

       $[fg.cs<n>] $[bg.cs<n>] $[hilight.cs<n>] $[shadow.cs<n>]
           These parameters are replaced with the name of the foreground (fg),
           background (bg), hilight (hilight) or shadow (shadow) color that is
           defined in colorset <n> (replace <n> with zero or a positive
           integer).  For example "$[fg.cs3]" is expanded to the name of the
           foreground color of colorset 3 (in rgb:rrrr/gggg/bbbb form).
           Please refer to the Colorsets section for details about colorsets.

       $[schedule.last]
           This is replaced by the id of the last command that was scheduled
           with the Schedule command, even if this command was already
           executed.

       $[schedule.next]
           This is replaced by the id the next command used with Schedule will
           get (unless a different id is specified explicitly).

       $[cond.rc]
           The return code of the last conditional command.  This variable is
           only valid inside a function and can not be used in a conditional
           command.  Please refer to the section Conditional Commands in the
           command list.

       $[func.context]
           The context character of the running command as used in the Mouse,
           Key or PointerKey command.  This is useful for example with:

               Mouse 3 FS N WindowShade $$[func.context]


       $[gt.str]
           return the translation of str by looking in the current locale
           catalogs.  If no translation is found str is returned as is.  See
           the LocalePath command.

       $[infostore.key]
           Return the value of the item stored in the InfoStore at the given
           key.  If no key is present, the unexpanded string is returned.

       $[...]
           If the string within the braces is neither of the above, fvwm tries
           to find an environment variable with this name and replaces its
           value if one is found (e.g. "$[PAGER]" could be replaced by
           "more").  Otherwise the string is left as is.

       Some examples can be found in the description of the AddToFunc command.

SCRIPTING & COMPLEX FUNCTIONS
       To achieve the more complex effects, fvwm has a number of commands that
       improve its scripting abilities.  Scripts can be read from a file with
       Read, from the output of a command with PipeRead or written as a
       complex function with the AddToFunc command.  For the curious, section
       7 of the fvwm FAQ shows some real life applications of scripting.
       Please refer to the sections User Functions and Shell Commands and
       Conditional Commands for details.  A word of warning: during execution
       of complex functions, fvwm needs to take all input from the mouse
       pointer (the pointer is "grabbed" in the slang of X).  No other
       programs can receive any input from the pointer while a function is
       run.  This can confuse some programs.  For example, the xwd program
       refuses to make screen shots when run from a complex function.  To
       achieve the same functionality you can use the Read or PipeRead command
       instead.

LIST OF FVWM COMMANDS
       The command descriptions below are grouped together in the following
       sections.  The sections are hopefully sorted in order of usefulness to
       the newcomer.

       ·   Menu commands


       ·   Miscellaneous commands


       ·   Commands affecting window movement and placement


       ·   Commands for focus and mouse movement


       ·   Commands controlling window state


       ·   Commands for mouse, key and stroke bindings


       ·   The Style command (controlling window styles)


       ·   Other commands controlling window styles


       ·   Commands controlling the virtual desktop


       ·   Commands for user functions and shell commands


       ·   Conditional commands


       ·   Module commands


       ·   Quit, restart and session management commands


       ·   Colorsets


       ·   Color gradients


   Menus
       Before a menu can be opened, it has to be populated with menu items
       using the AddToMenu command and bound to a key or mouse button with the
       Key, PointerKey or Mouse command (there are many other ways to invoke a
       menu too).  This is usually done in the configuration file.

       Fvwm menus are extremely configurable in look and feel.  Even the
       slightest nuances can be changed to the user's liking, including the
       menu item fonts, the background, delays before popping up sub menus,
       generating menus dynamically and many other features.  Please refer to
       the MenuStyle command to learn more.

       Types of Menus
              In fvwm there are four slightly different types of menus:

              Popup menus can appear everywhere on the screen on their own or
              attached to a part of a window.  The Popup command opens popup
              menus.  If the popup menu was invoked with a mouse button held
              down, it is closed when the button is released.  The item under
              the pointer is then activated and the associated action is
              executed.

              Menu is a very similar command, but the menus it opens are
              slightly less transient.  When invoked by clicking a mouse
              button, it stays open and can be navigated with no button held.
              But if it is invoked by a button press followed by mouse motion,
              it behaves exactly like a popup menu.

              Tear off menus or Pin up menus are menus from either of the
              above two commands that have been "torn off" their original
              context and pinned on the desktop like a normal window.  They
              are created from other menus by certain key presses or mouse
              sequences or with the TearMenuOff command from inside a menu.

              Sub menus are menus inside menus.  When a menu item that has the
              Popup command as its action is selected, the named menu is
              opened as an inferior menu to the parent.  Any type of menu can
              have sub menus.

       Menu Anatomy
              Menus consist of any number of titles which are inactive menu
              items that usually appear at the top of the menu, normal items
              triggering various actions when selected, separator lines
              between the items, tear off bars (a horizontal broken line) that
              tear off the menu when selected, and sub menu items indicated
              with a triangle pointing left or right, depending on the
              direction in which the sub menu appears.  All the above menu
              items are optional.

              Additionally, if the menu is too long to fit on the screen, the
              excess menu items are put in a continuation menu and a sub menu
              with the string "More..." is placed at the bottom of the menu.
              The "More..." string honors the locale settings.

              Finally, there may be a picture running up either side of the
              menu (a "side bar").

       Menu Navigation
              Menus can be navigated either with the keyboard or with the
              mouse.  Many people prefer to use the mouse, but it can be
              rather tedious.  Once you get the hang of it, keyboard
              navigation can be much faster.  While fvwm displays a menu, it
              can do nothing else.  For example, new windows do not appear
              before the menu is closed.  However, this is not exactly true
              for tear off menus.  See the Tear Off Menus section for details.

       Mouse Navigation
              Moving the pointer over a menu selects the item below it.
              Normally this is indicated by a 3d border around the item, but
              not all parts of a menu can be selected.  Pressing any mouse
              button while a menu is open by default activates the item below
              it.  Items of a popup menu are also activated by releasing a
              held mouse button.  In case of an item that hides a sub menu,
              the sub menu is displayed if the pointer hovers over the item
              long enough or moves close to the triangle indicating the sub
              menu.  This behaviour can be tuned with menu styles.

              Scrolling a mouse wheel over a menu either wraps the pointer
              along the menu (default), scrolls the menu under the pointer or
              act as if the menu was clicked depending on the MouseWheel menu
              style.

              Clicking on a selected item activates it - what happens exactly
              depends on the type of the item.

              Clicking on a title, a separator, the side bar, or outside the
              menu closes the menu (exception: tear off menus can not be
              closed this way).  Pressing mouse button 2 over a menu title or
              activating a tear off bar creates a tear off menu from the
              current menu.  Clicking on a normal menu item invokes the
              command that is bound to it, and clicking on a sub menu item
              either closes all open menus and replaces them with the sub menu
              or posts the menu (default).

              Posting menus is meant to ease mouse navigation.  Once a sub
              menu is posted, only items from that sub menu can be selected.
              This can be very useful to navigate the menu if the pointer
              tends to stray off the menu.  To unpost the menu and revert back
              to normal operation, either click on the same sub menu item or
              press any key.

       Keyboard Navigation
              Just like with mouse navigation, the item below the pointer is
              selected.  This is achieved by warping the pointer to the menu
              items when necessary.  While a menu is open, all key presses are
              intercepted by the menu.  No other application can get keyboard
              input (although this is not the case for tear off menus).

              Items can be selected directly by pressing a hotkey that can be
              configured individually for each menu item.  The hotkey is
              indicated by underlining it in the menu item label.  With the
              AutomaticHotkeys menu style fvwm automatically assigns hotkeys
              to all menu items.

              The most basic keys to navigate through menus are the cursor
              keys (move up or down one item, enter or leave a sub menu),
              Space (activate item) and Escape (close menu).  Numerous other
              keys can be used to navigate through menus by default:

              Enter, Return, Space activate the current item.

              Escape, Delete, Ctrl-G exit the current sequence of menus or
              destroy a tear off menu.

              J, N, Cursor-Down, Tab, Meta-Tab, Ctrl-F, move to the next item.

              K, P, Cursor-Up, Shift-Tab, Shift-Meta-Tab, Ctrl-B, move to the
              prior item.

              L, Cursor-Right, F enter a sub menu.

              H, Cursor-Left, B return to the prior menu.

              Ctrl-Cursor-Up, Ctrl-K Ctrl-P, Shift-Ctrl-Meta-Tab, Page-Up move
              up five items.

              Ctrl-Cursor-Down, Ctrl-J Ctrl-N, Ctrl-Meta-Tab Page-Down move
              down five items.

              Shift-P, Home, Shift-Cursor-Up, Ctrl-A move to the first item.

              Shift-N, End, Shift-Cursor-Down, Ctrl-E move to the last item.

              Meta-P, Meta-Cursor-Up, Ctrl-Cursor-Left, Shift-Ctrl-Tab, move
              up just below the next separator.

              Meta-N, Meta-Cursor-Down, Ctrl-Cursor-Right, Ctrl-Tab, move down
              just below the next separator.

              Insert opens the "More..." sub menu if any.

              Backspace tears off the menu.

       Menu Bindings
              The keys and mouse buttons used to navigate the menu can be
              configured using the Key and Mouse commands with the special
              context 'M', possible combined with 'T' for the menu title, 'I'
              for other menu items, 'S' for any border or sidepic, '[' for
              left border including a left sidepic, ']' for right border
              including a right sidepic, '-' for top border, '_' for bottom
              border.  The menu context uses its own set of actions that can
              be bound to keys and mouse buttons.  These are MenuClose,
              MenuCloseAndExec, MenuEnterContinuation, MenuEnterSubmenu,
              MenuLeaveSubmenu, MenuMoveCursor, MenuCursorLeft,
              MenuCursorRight, MenuSelectItem, MenuScroll and MenuTearOff.

              It is not possible to override the key Escape with no modifiers
              for closing the menu.  Neither is it possible to undefine mouse
              button 1, the arrow keys or the enter key for minimal
              navigation.

              MenuClose exits from the current sequence of menus or destroys a
              tear off menu.

              MenuCloseAndExec exits from the current sequence of menus or
              destroys a tear off menu and executes the rest of the line as a
              command.

              MenuEnterContinuation opens the "More..." sub menu if any.

              MenuEnterSubmenu enters a sub menu.

              MenuLeaveSubmenu returns to the prior menu.

              MenuMoveCursor n [m] moves the selection to another item.  If
              the first argument is zero the second argument specifies an
              absolute item in the menu to move the pointer to.  Negative
              items are counted from the end of the menu.  If the first
              argument is non-zero, the second argument must be omitted, and
              the first argument specifies a relative change in the selected
              item.  The positions may be suffixed with a 's' to indicate that
              the items should refer only to the first items after separators.

              MenuCursorLeft enters a sub menu with the SubmenusLeft menu
              style, and returns to the prior menu with the SubmenusRight menu
              style.

              MenuCursorRight enters a sub menu with the SubmenusRight menu
              style, and returns to the prior menu with the SubmenusLeft menu
              style.

              MenuSelectItem triggers the action for the menu item.

              MenuScroll n performs menu scrolling according to the MouseWheel
              menu style with n items.  The distance can be suffixed with an
              's' to indicate the items should refer only to the first items
              after separators.

              MenuTearOff turns a normal menu into a "torn off" menu.  See
              Tear Off Menus for details.

       Tear Off Menus
              A tear off menu is any menu that has been "torn off" the window
              it was attached to and pinned to the root window.  There are
              three ways to tear off a menu: click on the menu title with
              mouse button 2, press Backspace in the menu or activate its tear
              off bar (a horizontal bar with a broken line).  Tear off bars
              must be added to the menu as any other item by assigning them
              the command TearMenuOff.

              The builtin tear off actions can be overridden by undefining the
              builtin menu actions bound to tear off.  To remove the builtin
              mouse button 2 binding, use:

                  Mouse 2 MT A -

              and to remove the builtin backspace binding, use:

                  Key Backspace M A -

              See the section Menu Bindings for details on how to assign other
              bindings for tear off.

              Note that prior to fvwm 2.5.20 the tear off mouse bindings were
              redefined in different way, which no longer work.

              The window containing the menu is placed as any other window
              would be.  If you find it confusing to have your tear off menus
              appear at random positions on the screen, put this line in your
              configuration file:

                  Style fvwm_menu UsePPosition

              To remove borders and buttons from a tear-off menu but keep the
              menu title, you can use

                  Style fvwm_menu !Button 0, !Button 1
                  Style fvwm_menu !Button 2, !Button 3
                  Style fvwm_menu !Button 4, !Button 5
                  Style fvwm_menu !Button 6, !Button 7
                  Style fvwm_menu !Button 8, !Button 9
                  Style fvwm_menu Title, HandleWidth 0

              A tear off menu is a cross breeding between a window and a menu.
              The menu is swallowed by a window and its title is stripped off
              and displayed in the window title.  The main advantage is that
              the menu becomes permanent - activating an item does not close
              the menu.  Therefore, it can be used multiple times without
              reopening it.  To destroy such a menu, close its window or press
              the Escape key.

              Tear off menus behave somewhat differently than normal menus and
              windows.  They do not take the keyboard focus, but while the
              pointer is over one of them, all key presses are sent to the
              menu.  Other fvwm key bindings are disabled as long as the
              pointer is inside the tear off menu or one of its sub menus.
              When the pointer leaves this area, all sub menus are closed
              immediately.  Note that the window containing a tear off menu is
              never hilighted as if it had the focus.

              A tear off menu is an independent copy of the menu it originated
              from.  As such, it is not affected by adding items to that menu
              or changing its menu style.

              To create a tear off menu without opening the normal menu first,
              the option TearOffImmediately can be added to the Menu or Popup
              command.

       AddToMenu menu-name [menu-label action]
              Begins or adds to a menu definition.  Typically a menu
              definition looks like this:

                  AddToMenu Utilities Utilities Title
                   + Xterm           Exec  exec xterm -e tcsh
                   + Rxvt            Exec  exec rxvt
                   + "Remote Logins" Popup Remote-Logins
                   + Top             Exec  exec rxvt -T Top -n Top -e top
                   + Calculator      Exec  exec xcalc
                   + Xman            Exec  exec xman
                   + Xmag            Exec  exec xmag
                   + emacs           Exec  exec xemacs
                   + Mail            MailFunction xmh "-font fixed"
                   + ""              Nop
                   + Modules         Popup Module-Popup
                   + ""              Nop
                   + Exit Fvwm       Popup Quit-Verify

              The menu could be invoked via

                  Mouse 1 R A Menu Utilities Nop

              or

                  Mouse 1 R A Popup Utilities

              There is no end-of-menu symbol.  Menus do not have to be defined
              in a contiguous region of the config file.  The quoted (or first
              word) portion in the above examples is the menu label, which
              appears in the menu when the user pops it up.  The remaining
              portion is an fvwm command which is executed if the user selects
              that menu item.  An empty menu-label ("") and the Nop function
              are used to insert a separator into the menu.

              The keywords DynamicPopUpAction and DynamicPopDownAction have a
              special meaning when used as the name of a menu item.  The
              action following the keyword is executed whenever the menu is
              popped up or down.  This way you can implement dynamic menus.
              It is even possible to destroy itself with DestroyMenu and the
              rebuild from scratch.  When the menu has been destroyed (unless
              you used the recreate option when destroying the menu), do not
              forget to add the dynamic action again.

              Note: Do not trigger actions that require user interaction.
              They may fail and may screw up your menus.  See the Silent
              command.

              Warning
              Do not issue MenuStyle commands as dynamic menu actions.
              Chances are good that this crashes fvwm.

              There are several configurable scripts installed together with
              fvwm for automatic menu generation.  They have their own man
              pages.  Some of them, specifically fvwm-menu-directory and
              fvwm-menu-desktop, may be used with DynamicPopupAction to create
              a directory listing or GNOME/KDE application listing.

              Example (File browser):

                  # You can find the shell script fvwm_make_browse_menu.sh
                  # in the utils/ directory of the distribution.
                  AddToMenu BrowseMenu
                  + DynamicPopupAction PipeRead \
                    'fvwm_make_browse_menu.sh BrowseMenu'

              Example (Picture menu):

                  # Build a menu of all .jpg files in
                  # $HOME/Pictures
                  AddToMenu JpgMenu foo title
                  + DynamicPopupAction Function MakeJpgMenu

                  AddToFunc MakeJpgMenu
                  + I DestroyMenu recreate JpgMenu
                  + I AddToMenu JpgMenu Pictures Title
                  + I PipeRead 'for i in $HOME/Pictures/*.jpg; \
                    do echo AddToMenu JpgMenu "`basename $i`" Exec xv $i; done'

              The keyword MissingSubmenuFunction has a similar meaning.  It is
              executed whenever you try to pop up a sub menu that does not
              exist.  With this function you can define and destroy menus on
              the fly.  You can use any command after the keyword, but if the
              name of an item (that is a submenu) defined with AddToFunc
              follows it, fvwm executes this command:

                  Function <function-name> <submenu-name>

              i.e. the name is passed to the function as its first argument
              and can be referred to with "$0".

              The fvwm-menu-directory script mentioned above may be used with
              MissingSubmenuFunction to create an up to date recursive
              directory listing.

              Example:

                  # There is another shell script fvwm_make_directory_menu.sh
                  # in the utils/ directory of the distribution. To use it,
                  # define this function in your configuration file:

                  DestroyFunc MakeMissingDirectoryMenu
                  AddToFunc MakeMissingDirectoryMenu
                  + I PipeRead fvwm_make_directory_menu.sh $0

                  DestroyMenu SomeMenu
                  AddToMenu SomeMenu
                  + MissingSubmenuFunction MakeMissingDirectoryMenu
                  + "Root directory" Popup /

              This is another implementation of the file browser that uses sub
              menus for subdirectories.

              Titles can be used within the menu.  If you add the option top
              behind the keyword Title, the title is added to the top of the
              menu.  If there was a title already, it is overwritten.

                  AddToMenu Utilities Tools Title top

              All text up to the first Tab in the menu label is aligned to the
              left side of the menu, all text right of the first Tab is
              aligned to the left in a second column and all text thereafter
              is placed right aligned in the third column.  All other Tab s
              are replaced by spaces.  Note that you can change this format
              with the ItemFormat option of the MenuStyle command.

              If the menu-label contains an ampersand ('&'), the next
              character is taken as a hot-key for the menu item.  Hot-keys are
              underlined in the label.  To get a literal '&', insert "&&".
              Pressing the hot-key moves through the list of menu items with
              this hot-key or selects an item that is the only one with this
              hot-key.

              If the menu-label contains a sub-string which is set off by
              stars, then the text between the stars is expected to be the
              name of an image file to insert in the menu.  To get a literal
              '*', insert "**".  For example

                  + Calculator*xcalc.xpm* Exec exec xcalc

              inserts a menu item labeled "Calculator" with a picture of a
              calculator above it.  The following:

                  + *xcalc.xpm*           Exec exec xcalc

              Omits the "Calculator" label, but leaves the picture.

              If the menu-label contains a sub-string which is set off by
              percent signs, then the text between the percent signs is
              expected to be the name of image file (a so called mini icon to
              insert to the left of the menu label.  A second mini icon that
              is drawn at the right side of the menu can be given in the same
              way.  To get a literal '%', insert "%%".  For example

                  + Calculator%xcalc.xpm% Exec exec xcalc

              inserts a menu item labeled "Calculator" with a picture of a
              calculator to the left.  The following:

                  + %xcalc.xpm%           Exec exec xcalc

              Omits the "Calculator" label, but leaves the picture.  The
              pictures used with this feature should be small (perhaps 16x16).

              If the menu-name (not the label) contains a sub-string which is
              set off by at signs ('@'), then the text between them is
              expected to be the name of an image file to draw along the left
              side of the menu (a side pixmap).  You may want to use the
              SidePic option of the MenuStyle command instead.  To get a
              literal '@', insert "@@".  For example

                  AddToMenu StartMenu@linux-menu.xpm@

              creates a menu with a picture in its bottom left corner.

              If the menu-name also contains a sub-string surrounded by '^'s,
              then the text between '^'s is expected to be the name of an X11
              color and the column containing the side picture is colored with
              that color.  You can set this color for a menu style using the
              SideColor option of the MenuStyle command.  To get a literal
              '^', insert "^^".  Example:

                  AddToMenu StartMenu@linux-menu.xpm@^blue^

              creates a menu with a picture in its bottom left corner and
              colors with blue the region of the menu containing the picture.

              In all the above cases, the name of the resulting menu is name
              specified, stripped of the substrings between the various
              delimiters.

       ChangeMenuStyle menustyle menu ...
              Changes the menu style of menu to menustyle.  You may specify
              more than one menu in each call of ChangeMenuStyle.

       CopyMenuStyle orig-menustyle dest-menustyle
              Copy orig-menustyle to dest-menustyle, where orig-menustyle is
              an existing menu style.  If the menu style dest_menustyle does
              not exist, then it is created.

       DestroyMenu [recreate] menu
              Deletes a menu, so that subsequent references to it are no
              longer valid.  You can use this to change the contents of a menu
              during an fvwm session.  The menu can be rebuilt using
              AddToMenu.  The optional parameter recreate tells fvwm not to
              throw away the menu completely but to throw away all the menu
              items (including the title).

                  DestroyMenu Utilities

       DestroyMenuStyle menustyle
              Deletes the menu style named menustyle and changes all menus
              using this style to the default style, you cannot destroy the
              default menu style.

                  DestroyMenuStyle pixmap1

       Menu menu-name [position] [double-click-action]
              Causes a previously defined menu to be popped up in a sticky
              manner.  That is, if the user invokes the menu with a click
              action instead of a drag action, the menu stays up.  The command
              double-click-action is invoked if the user double-clicks a
              button (or hits the key rapidly twice if the menu is bound to a
              key) when bringing up the menu.  If the double click action is
              not specified, double clicking on the menu does nothing.
              However, if the menu begins with a menu item (i.e. not with a
              title or a separator) and the double click action is not given,
              double clicking invokes the first item of the menu (but only if
              the pointer really was over the item).

              The pointer is warped to where it was when the menu was invoked
              if it was both invoked and closed with a keystroke.

              The position arguments allow placement of the menu somewhere on
              the screen, for example centered on the visible screen or above
              a title bar.  Basically it works like this: you specify a
              context-rectangle and an offset to this rectangle by which the
              upper left corner of the menu is moved from the upper left
              corner of the rectangle.  The position arguments consist of
              several parts:

              [context-rectangle] x y [special-options]

              The context-rectangle can be one of:

              Root
                  the root window of the current screen.

              XineramaRoot
                  the root window of the whole Xinerama screen.  Equivalent to
                  "root" when Xinerama is not used.

              Mouse
                  a 1x1 rectangle at the mouse position.

              Window
                  the frame of the context window.

              Interior
                  the inside of the context window.

              Title
                  the title of the context window or icon.

              Button<n>
                  button #n of the context window.

              Icon
                  the icon of the context window.

              Menu
                  the current menu.

              Item
                  the current menu item.

              Context
                  the current window, menu or icon.

              This
                  whatever widget the pointer is on (e.g. a corner of a window
                  or the root window).

              Rectangle <geometry>
                  the rectangle defined by <geometry> in X geometry format.
                  Width and height default to 1 if omitted.

              If the context-rectangle is omitted or illegal (e.g. "item" on a
              window), "Mouse" is the default.  Note that not all of these
              make sense under all circumstances (e.g. "Icon" if the pointer
              is on a menu).

              The offset values x and y specify how far the menu is moved from
              its default position.  By default, the numeric value given is
              interpreted as a percentage of the context rectangle's width
              (height), but with a trailing 'm' the menu's width (height) is
              used instead.  Furthermore a trailing 'p' changes the
              interpretation to mean pixels.

              Instead of a single value you can use a list of values.  All
              additional numbers after the first one are separated from their
              predecessor by their sign.  Do not use any other separators.

              If x or y are prefixed with "'o<number>" where <number> is an
              integer, the menu and the rectangle are moved to overlap at the
              specified position before any other offsets are applied.  The
              menu and the rectangle are placed so that the pixel at <number>
              percent of the rectangle's width/height is right over the pixel
              at <number> percent of the menu's width/height.  So "o0" means
              that the top/left borders of the menu and the rectangle overlap,
              with "o100" it's the bottom/right borders and if you use "o50"
              they are centered upon each other (try it and you will see it is
              much simpler than this description).  The default is "o0".  The
              prefix "o<number>" is an abbreviation for "+<number>-<number>m".

              A prefix of 'c' is equivalent to "o50".  Examples:

                  # window list in the middle of the screen
                  WindowList Root c c

                  # menu to the left of a window
                  Menu name window -100m c+0

                  # popup menu 8 pixels above the mouse pointer
                  Popup name mouse c -100m-8p

                  # somewhere on the screen
                  Menu name rectangle 512x384+1+1 +0 +0

                  # centered vertically around a menu item
                  AddToMenu foobar-menu
                   + "first item" Nop
                   + "special item" Popup "another menu" item +100 c
                   + "last item" Nop

                  # above the first menu item
                  AddToMenu foobar-menu
                   + "first item" Popup "another menu" item +0 -100m

              Note that you can put a sub menu far off the current menu so you
              could not reach it with the mouse without leaving the menu.  If
              the pointer leaves the current menu in the general direction of
              the sub menu the menu stays up.

              The special-options:

              To create a tear off menu without opening the normal menu, add
              the option TearOffImmediately.  Normally the menu opens in
              normal state for a split second before being torn off.  As
              tearing off places the menu like any other window, a position
              should be specified explicitly:

                  # Forbid fvwm to place the menu window
                  Style <name of menu> UsePPosition
                  # Menu at top left corner of screen
                  Menu Root 0p 0p TearOffImmediately

              The Animated and Mwm or Win menu styles may move a menu
              somewhere else on the screen.  If you do not want this you can
              add Fixed as an option.  This might happen for example if you
              want the menu always in the top right corner of the screen.

              Where do you want a menu to appear when you click on its menu
              item? The default is to place the title under the cursor, but if
              you want it where the position arguments say, use the
              SelectInPlace option.  If you want the pointer on the title of
              the menu, use SelectWarp too.  Note that these options apply
              only if the PopupAsRootMenu MenuStyle option is used.

              The pointer is warped to the title of a sub menu whenever the
              pointer would be on an item when the sub menu is popped up (fvwm
              menu style) or never warped to the title at all (Mwm or Win menu
              styles).  You can force (forbid) warping whenever the sub menu
              is opened with the WarpTitle (NoWarp) option.

              Note that the special-options do work with a normal menu that
              has no other position arguments.

       MenuStyle stylename [options]
              Sets a new menu style or changes a previously defined style.
              The stylename is the style name; if it contains spaces or tabs
              it has to be quoted.  The name "*" is reserved for the default
              menu style.  The default menu style is used for every menu-like
              object (e.g. the window created by the WindowList command) that
              had not be assigned a style using the ChangeMenuStyle.  See also
              DestroyMenuStyle.  When using monochrome color options are
              ignored.

              options is a comma separated list containing some of the
              keywords Fvwm / Mwm / Win, BorderWidth, Foreground, Background,
              Greyed, HilightBack / !HilightBack, HilightTitleBack, ActiveFore
              / !ActiveFore, MenuColorset, ActiveColorset, GreyedColorset,
              TitleColorset, Hilight3DThick / Hilight3DThin / Hilight3DOff,
              Hilight3DThickness, Animation / !Animation, Font, TitleFont,
              MenuFace, PopupDelay, PopupOffset, TitleWarp / !TitleWarp,
              TitleUnderlines0 / TitleUnderlines1 / TitleUnderlines2,
              SeparatorsLong / SeparatorsShort, TrianglesSolid /
              TrianglesRelief, PopupImmediately / PopupDelayed,
              PopdownImmediately / PopdownDelayed, PopupActiveArea,
              DoubleClickTime, SidePic, SideColor, PopupAsRootMenu /
              PopupAsSubmenu / PopupIgnore / PopupClose, RemoveSubmenus /
              HoldSubmenus, SubmenusRight / SubmenusLeft, SelectOnRelease,
              ItemFormat, VerticalItemSpacing, VerticalMargins,
              VerticalTitleSpacing, AutomaticHotkeys / !AutomaticHotkeys,
              UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate /
              !UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate, MouseWheel, ScrollOffPage /
              !ScrollOffPage, TrianglesUseFore / !TrianglesUseFore.

              In the above list some options are listed as option pairs or
              triples with a '/' in between.  These options exclude each
              other.  All paired options can be negated to have the effect of
              the counterpart option by prefixing ! to the option.

              Some options are now negated by prefixing ! to the option.  This
              is the preferred form for all such options.  The other negative
              forms are now deprecated and will be removed in the future.

              This is a list of MenuStyle deprecated negative options:
              ActiveForeOff, AnimationOff, AutomaticHotkeysOff,
              HilightBackOff, TitleWarpOff

              Fvwm, Mwm, Win reset all options to the style with the same name
              in former versions of fvwm.  The default for new menu styles is
              Fvwm style.  These options override all others except
              Foreground, Background, Greyed, HilightBack, ActiveFore and
              PopupDelay, so they should be used only as the first option
              specified for a menu style or to reset the style to defined
              behavior.  The same effect can be created by setting all the
              other options one by one.

              Mwm and Win style menus popup sub menus automatically.  Win
              menus indicate the current menu item by changing the background
              to dark.  Fvwm sub menus overlap the parent menu, Mwm and Win
              style menus never overlap the parent menu.

              Fvwm style is equivalent to !HilightBack, Hilight3DThin,
              !ActiveFore, !Animation, Font, MenuFace, PopupOffset 0 67,
              TitleWarp, TitleUnderlines1, SeparatorsShort, TrianglesRelief,
              PopupDelayed, PopdownDelayed, PopupDelay 150, PopdownDelay 150,
              PopupAsSubmenu, HoldSubmenus, SubmenusRight, BorderWidth 2,
              !AutomaticHotkeys, UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate,
              PopupActiveArea 75.

              Mwm style is equivalent to !HilightBack, Hilight3DThick,
              !ActiveFore, !Animation, Font, MenuFace, PopupOffset -3 100,
              !TitleWarp, TitleUnderlines2, SeparatorsLong, TrianglesRelief,
              PopupImmediately, PopdownDelayed, PopdownDelay 150,
              PopupAsSubmenu, HoldSubmenus, SubmenusRight, BorderWidth 2,
              UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate, !AutomaticHotkeys,
              PopupActiveArea 75.

              Win style is equivalent to HilightBack, Hilight3DOff,
              ActiveFore, !Animation, Font, MenuFace, PopupOffset -5 100,
              !TitleWarp, TitleUnderlines1, SeparatorsShort, TrianglesSolid,
              PopupImmediately, PopdownDelayed, PopdownDelay 150,
              PopupAsSubmenu, RemoveSubmenus, SubmenusRight, BorderWidth 2,
              UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate, !AutomaticHotkeys,
              PopupActiveArea 75.

              BorderWidth takes the thickness of the border around the menus
              in pixels.  It may be zero to 50 pixels.  The default is 2.
              Using an illegal value reverts the border width to the default.

              Foreground and Background may have a color name as an argument.
              This color is used for menu text or the menu's background.  You
              can omit the color name to reset these colors to the built-in
              default.

              Greyed may have a color name as an argument.  This color is the
              one used to draw a menu-selection which is prohibited (or not
              recommended) by the Mwm hints which an application has
              specified.  If the color is omitted the color of greyed menu
              entries is based on the background color of the menu.

              HilightBack and !HilightBack switch hilighting the background of
              the selected menu item on and off.  A specific background color
              may be used by providing the color name as an argument to
              HilightBack.  If you use this option without an argument the
              color is based on the menu's background color.  The
              ActiveColorset option overrides the specified color.  If the
              colorset has a non solid background it is used for the
              hilighting.

              HilightTitleBack switches hilighting the background of menu
              titles on.  If a TitleColorset was used, the background colour
              is taken from there.  Otherwise the color is based on the menu's
              background color.  If the colorset has a non solid background it
              is used for the hilighting.

              ActiveFore and !ActiveFore switch hilighting the foreground of
              the selected menu item on and off.  A specific foreground color
              may be used by providing the color name as an argument to
              ActiveFore.  Omitting the color turns hilighting on when an
              ActiveColorset is used.  ActiveFore turns off hilighting the
              foreground completely.  The ActiveColorset option overrides the
              specified color.

              MenuColorset controls if a colorset is used instead of the
              Foreground, Background and MenuFace menu styles.  If the
              MenuColorset keyword is followed by a number equal to zero or
              greater, this number is taken as the number of the colorset to
              use.  If the number is omitted, the colorset is switched off and
              the regular menu styles are used again.  The foreground and
              background colors of the menu items are replaced by the colors
              from the colorset.  If the colorset has a pixmap defined, this
              pixmap is used as the background of the menu.  Note that the
              MenuFace menu style has been optimized for memory consumption
              and may use less memory than the background from a colorset.
              The shape mask from the colorset is used to shape the menu.
              Please refer to the Colorsets section for details about
              colorsets.

              ActiveColorset works exactly like MenuColorset, but the
              foreground from the colorset replaces the color given with the
              ActiveFore menu style and the colorset's background color
              replaces the color given with the HilightBack command (to turn
              on background hilighting you have to use the HilightBack menu
              style too).  If specified, the hilight and shadow colors from
              the colorset are used too.  The pixmap and shape mask from the
              colorset are not used.  Hilighting the background or foreground
              can be turned off individually with the !ActiveFore or
              !HilightBack menu styles.

              GreyedColorset works exactly like MenuColorset, but the
              foreground from the colorset replaces the color given with the
              Greyed menu style.  No other parts of the colorset are used.

              TitleColorset works exactly like MenuColorset, but is used only
              for menu titles.

              Hilight3DThick, Hilight3DThin and Hilight3DOff determine if the
              selected menu item is hilighted with a 3D relief.  Thick reliefs
              are two pixels wide, thin reliefs are one pixel wide.

              Hilight3DThickness takes one numeric argument that may be
              between -50 and +50 pixels.  With negative values the menu item
              gets a pressed in look.  The above three commands are equivalent
              to a thickness of 2, 1 and 0.

              Animation and !Animation turn menu animation on or off.  When
              animation is on, sub menus that do not fit on the screen cause
              the parent menu to be shifted to the left so the sub menu can be
              seen.

              Font and TitleFont take a font name as an argument.  If a font
              by this name exists it is used for the text of all menu items.
              If it does not exist or if the name is left blank the built-in
              default is used.  If a TitleFont is given, it is used for all
              menu titles instead of the normal font.

              MenuFace enforces a fancy background upon the menus.  You can
              use the same options for MenuFace as for the ButtonStyle.  See
              description of ButtonStyle command and the Color Gradients
              sections for more information.  If you use MenuFace without
              arguments the style is reverted back to normal.

              Some examples of MenuFaces are:

                  MenuFace DGradient 128 2 lightgrey 50 blue 50 white
                  MenuFace TiledPixmap texture10.xpm
                  MenuFace HGradient 128 2 Red 40 Maroon 60 White
                  MenuFace Solid Maroon

              Note: The gradient styles H, V, B and D are optimized for high
              speed and low memory consumption in menus.  This is not the case
              for all the other gradient styles.  They may be slow and consume
              huge amounts of memory, so if you encounter performance problems
              with them you may be better off by not using them.  To improve
              performance you can try one or all of the following:

              Turn hilighting of the active menu item other than foreground
              color off:

                  MenuStyle <style> Hilight3DOff, !HilightBack
                  MenuStyle <style> ActiveFore <preferred color>

              Make sure sub menus do not overlap the parent menu.  This can
              prevent menus being redrawn every time a sub menu pops up or
              down.

                  MenuStyle <style> PopupOffset 1 100

              Run your X server with backing storage.  If your X Server is
              started with the -bs option, turn it off.  If not try the -wm
              and +bs options:

                  startx -- -wm +bs

              You may have to adapt this example to your system (e.g. if you
              use xinit to start X).

              PopupDelay requires one numeric argument.  This value is the
              delay in milliseconds before a sub menu is popped up when the
              pointer moves over a menu item that has a sub menu.  If the
              value is zero no automatic pop up is done.  If the argument is
              omitted the built-in default is used.  Note that the popup delay
              has no effect if the PopupImmediately option is used since sub
              menus pop up immediately then.

              PopupImmediately makes menu items with sub menus pop up it up as
              soon as the pointer enters the item.  The PopupDelay option is
              ignored then.  If PopupDelayed is used fvwm looks at the
              PopupDelay option if or when this automatic popup happens.

              PopdownDelay works exactly like PopupDelay but determines the
              timeout of the PopupDelayed style.

              PopdownImmediately makes sub menus vanish as soon as the pointer
              leaves the sub menu and the correspondent item in the parent
              menu.  With the opposite option PopdownDelayed the sub menu only
              pops down after the time specified with the PopdownDelay option.
              This comes handy when the pointer often strays off the menu item
              when trying to move into the sub menu.  Whenever there is a
              conflict between the PopupImmediately, PopupDelayed, PopupDelay
              styles and the PopdownImmediately, PopdownDelayed, PopdownDelay
              styles, the Popup...  styles win when using mouse navigation and
              the Popdown...  styles win when navigating with the keyboard.

              PopupOffset requires two integer arguments.  Both values affect
              where sub menus are placed relative to the parent menu.  If both
              values are zero, the left edge of the sub menu overlaps the left
              edge of the parent menu.  If the first value is non-zero the sub
              menu is shifted that many pixels to the right (or left if
              negative).  If the second value is non-zero the menu is moved by
              that many percent of the parent menu's width to the right or
              left.

              PopupActiveArea requires an integer value between 51 and 100.
              Normally, when the pointer is over a menu item with a sub menu
              and the pointer enters the area that starts at 75% of the menu
              width, the sub menu is shown immediately.  This percentage can
              be changed with PopupActiveArea.  Setting this value to 100
              disables this kind of automatic popups altogether.  The default
              value is restored if no or an illegal value is given.

              TitleWarp and !TitleWarp affect if the pointer warps to the menu
              title when a sub menu is opened or not.  Note that regardless of
              this setting the pointer is not warped if the menu does not pop
              up under the pointer.

              TitleUnderlines0, TitleUnderlines1 and TitleUnderlines2 specify
              how many lines are drawn below a menu title.

              SeparatorsLong and SeparatorsShort set the length of menu
              separators.  Long separators run from the left edge all the way
              to the right edge.  Short separators leave a few pixels to the
              edges of the menu.

              TrianglesSolid and TrianglesRelief affect how the small
              triangles for sub menus is drawn.  Solid triangles are filled
              with a color while relief triangles are hollow.

              DoubleClickTime requires one numeric argument.  This value is
              the time in milliseconds between two mouse clicks in a menu to
              be considered as a double click.  The default is 450
              milliseconds.  If the argument is omitted the double click time
              is reset to this default.

              SidePic takes the name of an image file as an argument.  The
              picture is drawn along the left side of the menu.  The SidePic
              option can be overridden by a menu specific side pixmap (see
              AddToMenu).  If the file name is omitted an existing side pixmap
              is removed from the menu style.

              SideColor takes the name of an X11 color as an argument.  This
              color is used to color the column containing the side picture
              (see above).  The SideColor option can be overridden by a menu
              specific side color (see AddToMenu).  If the color name is
              omitted the side color option is switched off.

              PopupAsRootMenu, PopupAsSubmenu, PopupIgnore and PopupClose
              change the behavior when you click on a menu item that opens a
              sub menu.  With PopupAsRootMenu the original menu is closed
              before the sub menu appears, with PopupAsSubmenu it is not, so
              you can navigate back into the parent menu.  Furthermore, with
              PopupAsSubmenu the sub menu is held open (posted) regardless of
              where you move the mouse.  Depending on your menu style this may
              simplify navigating through the menu.  Any keystroke while a
              menu is posted reverts the menu back to the normal behavior.
              With PopupClose the menu is closed when a sub menu item is
              activated, and the menu stays open if PopupIgnore is used (even
              if the menu was invoked with the Popup command).  PopupAsSubmenu
              is the default.

              RemoveSubmenus instructs fvwm to remove sub menu when you move
              back into the parent menu.  With HoldSubmenus the sub menu
              remains visible.  You probably want to use HoldSubmenus if you
              are using the PopupDelayed style.  RemoveSubmenus affects menu
              navigation with the keyboard.

              SelectOnRelease takes an optional key name as an argument.  If
              the given key is released in a menu using this style, the
              current menu item is selected.  This is intended for Alt-Tab
              WindowList navigation.  The key name is a standard X11 key name
              as defined in /usr/include/X11/keysymdef.h, (without the XK_
              prefix), or the keysym database /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/XKeysymDB.
              To disable this behavior, omit the key name.

              Note: Some X servers do not support KeyRelease events.
              SelectOnRelease does not work on such a machine.

              ItemFormat takes a special string as its argument that
              determines the layout of the menu items.  Think of the format
              string as if it were a menu item.  All you have to do is tell
              fvwm where to place the different parts of the menu item (i.e.
              the labels, the triangle denoting a sub menu, the mini icons and
              the side pic) in the blank area.  The string consists of spaces,
              Tab characters and formatting directives beginning with '%'.
              Any illegal characters and formatting directives are silently
              ignored:

              %l, %c and %r
                  Insert the next item label.  Up to three labels can be used.
                  The item column is left-aligned (%l), centered (%c) or
                  right-aligned (%r).

              %i
                  Inserts the mini icon.

              %> and %<
                  Insert the sub menu triangle pointing either to the right
                  (%>) or to the left (%<).

              %|
                  The first %| denotes the beginning of the area that is
                  highlighted either with a background color or a relief (or
                  both).  The second %| marks the end of this area.  %| can be
                  used up to twice in the string.  If you do not add one or
                  both of them, fvwm sets the margins to the margins of the
                  whole item (not counting the side picture).

              %s
                  Places the side picture either at the beginning or the end
                  of the menu.  This directive may be used only once and only
                  as the first or last in the format string.  If the %s is not
                  at the beginning of the string, menus are not drawn
                  properly.

              Space, Tab, %Space and %Tab
                  Add gap of one space, or a tab, using the width of the menu
                  font.  When using a tab, the size of the gap can be one to 8
                  spaces since the tab position is a multiple of 8 from the
                  edge of the menu.  The whole string must be quoted if spaces
                  or tabs are used.

              %p
                  Like Space and Tab %p inserts an empty area into the item,
                  but with better control of its size (see below).

              You can define an additional space before and after each of the
              objects like this:

                  %left.rightp

              This means: if the object is defined in the menu (e.g. if it is
              %s and you use a side picture, or it is %l for the third column
              and there are items defined that actually have a third column),
              then add left pixels before the object and right pixels after
              it.  You may leave out the left or the .right parts if you do
              not need them.  All values up to the screen width are allowed.
              Even negative values can be used with care.  The p may be
              replaced with any other formatting directives described above.

              Note: Only items defined in the format string are visible in the
              menus.  So if you do not put a %s in there you do not see a side
              picture, even if one is specified.

              Note: The SubmenusLeft style changes the default ItemFormat
              string, but if it was set manually it is not modified.

              Note: If any unformatted title of the menu is wider than the
              widest menu item, the spaces between the different parts of the
              menu items are enlarged to match the width of the title.
              Leading left aligned objects in the format string (%l, %i, %<,
              first %|) stick to the left edge of the menu and trailing right
              aligned objects (%r, %i, %>, second %|) stick to the right edge.
              The gaps between the remaining items are enlarged equally.

              Examples:

                  MenuStyle * ItemFormat "%.4s%.1|%.5i%.5l%.5l%.5r%.5i%2.3>%1|"

              Is the default string used by fvwm: (side picture + 4 pixels
              gap) (beginning of the hilighted area + 1 pixel gap) (mini icon
              + 5p) (first column left aligned + 5p) (second column left
              aligned + 5p) (third column right aligned + 5p) (second mini
              icon + 5p) (2p + sub menu triangle + 3p) (1p + end of hilighted
              area).

                  MenuStyle * ItemFormat "%.1|%3.2<%5i%5l%5l%5r%5i%1|%4s"

              Is used by fvwm with the SubmenusLeft option below.

              VerticalItemSpacing and VerticalTitleSpacing control the
              vertical spacing of menu items and titles like ItemFormat
              controls the horizontal spacing.  Both take two numeric
              arguments that may range from -100 to +100.  The first is the
              gap in pixels above a normal menu item (or a menu title), the
              second is the gap in pixels below it.  Negative numbers do not
              make much sense and may screw up the menu completely.  If no
              arguments are given or the given arguments are invalid, the
              built-in defaults are used: one pixel above the item or title
              and two below.

              VerticalMargins can be used to add some padding at the top and
              bottom of menus.  It takes two numeric arguments that must be
              positive integers (or zero).  If the number of arguments or its
              values are incorrect, fvwm defaults both to 0, which means no
              padding at all.  If the values are correct, the first one is
              used for the top margin, and the second one is used for the
              bottom margin.

              SubmenusLeft mirrors the menu layout and behavior.  Sub menus
              pop up to the left, the sub menu triangle is drawn left and the
              mini icon and side picture are drawn at the right side of the
              menu.  The default is SubmenusRight.  The position hints of a
              menu are also affected by this setting, i.e. position hints
              using item or menu as context rectangle and position hints using
              m offsets.

              AutomaticHotkeys and !AutomaticHotkeys control the menu's
              ability to automatically provide hot-keys on the first character
              of each menu item's label.  This behavior is always overridden
              if an explicit hot-key is assigned in the AddToMenu command.

              UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate and
              !UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate controls how menu items are
              invoked when used with hotkeys.  By default, if a given menu
              entry only has one completeable match for a given hotkey, the
              action for that menu entry is invoked and the menu is closed.
              This is due to the UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate option.
              However, the menu can be told to remain open, waiting for the
              user to invoke the selected item instead when there is only one
              matched item for a given hotkey, by using the
              !UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate option.

              MouseWheel controls the ability to scroll the menu using a mouse
              wheel.  It takes one argument, that can be one of
              ScrollsPointer, ScrollsMenu, ScrollsMenuBackwards or
              ActivatesItem.  ScrollsPointer makes the mouse wheel scroll the
              pointer over a menu.  This is the default.  ScrollsMenu and
              ScrollsMenuBackwards scroll the menu beneath the pointer.
              ActivatesItem disables scrolling by mouse wheel and makes the
              use of a mouse wheel act as if the menu was clicked.  If no
              argument is supplied the default setting is restored.

              ScrollOffPage allows a menu to be scrolled out of the visible
              area if MouseWheel is set to ScrollsMenu or
              ScrollsMenuBackwards.  This is the default.  The opposite,
              !ScrollOffPage disables this behaviour.

              TrianglesUseFore draws sub menu triangles with the foreground
              color of the menu colorset (normally drawn with the hilight
              color).  !TrianglesUseFore disables this behaviour.

              Examples:

                  MenuStyle * Mwm
                  MenuStyle * Foreground Black, Background gray40
                  MenuStyle * Greyed gray70, ActiveFore White
                  MenuStyle * !HilightBack, Hilight3DOff
                  MenuStyle * Font lucidasanstypewriter-14
                  MenuStyle * MenuFace DGradient 64 darkgray MidnightBlue

                  MenuStyle red Mwm
                  MenuStyle red Foreground Yellow
                  MenuStyle red Background Maroon
                  MenuStyle red Greyed Red, ActiveFore Red
                  MenuStyle red !HilightBack, Hilight3DOff
                  MenuStyle red Font lucidasanstypewriter-12
                  MenuStyle red MenuFace DGradient 64 Red Black

              Note that all style options could be placed on a single line for
              each style name.

       MenuStyle forecolor backcolor shadecolor font style [anim]
              This is the old syntax of the MenuStyle command.  It is obsolete
              and may be removed in the future.  Please use the new syntax as
              described above.

              Sets the menu style.  When using monochrome the colors are
              ignored.  The shadecolor is the one used to draw a
              menu-selection which is prohibited (or not recommended) by the
              Mwm hints which an application has specified.  The style option
              is either Fvwm, Mwm or Win, which changes the appearance and
              operation of the menus.

              Mwm and Win style menus popup sub menus automatically.  Win
              menus indicate the current menu item by changing the background
              to black.  Fvwm sub menus overlap the parent menu, Mwm and Win
              style menus never overlap the parent menu.

              When the anim option is given, sub menus that do not fit on the
              screen cause the parent menu to be shifted to the left so the
              sub menu can be seen.  See also SetAnimation command.

       Popup PopupName [position] [default-action]
              This command has two purposes: to bind a menu to a key or mouse
              button, and to bind a sub menu into a menu.  The formats for the
              two purposes differ slightly.  The position arguments are the
              same as for Menu.  The command default-action is invoked if the
              user clicks a button to invoke the menu and releases it
              immediately again (or hits the key rapidly twice if the menu is
              bound to a key).  If the default action is not specified, double
              clicking on the menu does nothing.  However, if the menu begins
              with a menu item (i.e. not with a title or a separator) and the
              default action is not given, double clicking invokes the first
              item of the menu (but only if the pointer really was over the
              item).

              To bind a previously defined pop-up menu to a key or mouse
              button:

              The following example binds mouse buttons 2 and 3 to a pop-up
              called "Window Ops".  The menu pops up if the buttons 2 or 3 are
              pressed in the window frame, side-bar, or title-bar, with no
              modifiers (none of shift, control, or meta).

                  Mouse 2 FST N Popup "Window Ops"
                  Mouse 3 FST N Popup "Window Ops"

              Pop-ups can be bound to keys through the use of the Key command.
              Pop-ups can be operated without using the mouse by binding to
              keys and operating via the up arrow, down arrow, and enter keys.

              To bind a previously defined pop-up menu to another menu, for
              use as a sub menu:

              The following example defines a sub menu "Quit-Verify" and binds
              it into a main menu, called "RootMenu":

                  AddToMenu Quit-Verify
                   + "Really Quit Fvwm?" Title
                   + "Yes, Really Quit"  Quit
                   + "Restart Fvwm"      Restart
                   + "Restart Fvwm 1.xx" Restart fvwm1 -s
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + "No, Don't Quit"    Nop

                  AddToMenu RootMenu "Root Menu" Title
                   + "Open XTerm Window" Popup NewWindowMenu
                   + "Login as Root"     Exec exec xterm -T Root -n Root -e su -
                   + "Login as Anyone"   Popup AnyoneMenu
                   + "Remote Hosts"      Popup HostMenu
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + "X utilities"       Popup Xutils
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + "Fvwm Modules"      Popup Module-Popup
                   + "Fvwm Window Ops"   Popup Window-Ops
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + "Previous Focus"    Prev (AcceptsFocus) Focus
                   + "Next Focus"        Next (AcceptsFocus) Focus
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + "Refresh screen"    Refresh
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + "Reset X defaults"  Exec xrdb -load \
                                         $HOME/.Xdefaults
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + Quit                Popup Quit-Verify

              Popup differs from Menu in that pop-ups do not stay up if the
              user simply clicks.  These are popup-menus, which are a little
              hard on the wrist.  Menu menus stay up on a click action.  See
              the Menu command for an explanation of the interactive behavior
              of menus.  A menu can be open up to ten times at once, so a menu
              may even use itself or any of its predecessors as a sub menu.

       TearMenuOff
              When assigned to a menu item, it inserts a tear off bar into the
              menu (a horizontal broken line).  Activating that item tears off
              the menu.  If the menu item has a label, it is shown instead of
              the broken line.  If used outside menus, this command does
              nothing.  Examples:

                  AddToMenu WindowMenu
                  + I "" TearMenuOff

                  AddToMenu RootMenu
                  + I "click here to tear me off" TearMenuOff

       Title
              Does nothing This is used to insert a title line in a popup or
              menu.

   Miscellaneous Commands
       BugOpts [option [bool]], ...
              This command controls several workarounds for bugs in third
              party programs.  The individual options are separated by commas.
              The optional argument bool is a boolean argument and controls if
              the bug workaround is enabled or not.  It can either be "True"
              or "False" to turn the option on or off, or "toggle" to switch
              is back and forth.  If bool is omitted, the default setting is
              restored.

              FlickeringMoveWorkaround disables ConfigureNotify events that
              are usually sent to an application while it is moved.  If some
              windows flicker annoyingly while being moved, this option may
              help you.  Note that if this problem occurs it is not an fvwm
              bug, it is a problem of the application.

              MixedVisualWorkaround makes fvwm install the root colormap
              before it does some operations using the root window visuals.
              This is only useful when the -visual option is used to start
              fvwm and then only with some configurations of some servers
              (e.g. Exceed 6.0 with an 8 bit PseudoColor root and fvwm using a
              24 bit TrueColor visual).

              The ModalityIsEvil option controls whether Motif applications
              have the ability to have modal dialogs (dialogs that force you
              to close them first before you can do anything else).  The
              default is to not allow applications to have modal dialogs.  Use
              this option with care.  Once this option is turned on, you have
              to restart fvwm to turn it off.

              RaiseOverNativeWindows makes fvwm try to raise the windows it
              manages over native windows of the X server's host system.  This
              is needed for some X servers running under Windows, Windows NT
              or Mac OS X.  Fvwm tries to detect if it is running under such
              an X server and initializes the flag accordingly.

              RaiseOverUnmanaged makes fvwm try to raise the windows it
              manages over override_redirect windows.  This is used to cope
              with ill-mannered applications that use long-lived windows of
              this sort, contrary to ICCCM conventions.  It is useful with the
              Unmanaged style option too.

              FlickeringQtDialogsWorkaround suppresses flickering of the
              focused window in some modules when using KDE or QT applications
              with application modal dialog windows.  By default this option
              is turned on.  This option may be visually disturbing for other
              applications using windows not managed by fvwm.  Since these
              applications are rare it is most likely safe to leave this
              option at its default.

              QtDragnDropWorkaround suppresses the forwarding of unknown
              ClientEvent messages to windows -- usually this is harmless, but
              Qt has problems handling unrecognised ClientEvent messages.
              Enabling this option might therefore help for Qt applications
              using DragnDrop.  This option is off by default.

              EWMHIconicStateWorkaround is needed by EWMH compliant pagers or
              taskbars which represent windows which are on a different
              desktops as iconified.  These pagers and taskbars use a version
              of the EWMH specification before version 1.2 (the current KDE 2
              & 3 versions).  These pagers and taskbars use the IconicState
              WM_STATE state to determine if an application is iconified.
              This state, according to the ICCCM, does not imply that a window
              is iconified (in the usual sense).  Turning on this option
              forces fvwm to establish an equivalence between the IconicState
              WM_STATE state and the iconified window.  This violates ICCCM
              compliance but should not cause big problems.  By default this
              option is off.

              With the DisplayNewWindowNames enabled, fvwm prints the name,
              icon name (if available), resource and class of new windows to
              the console.  This can help in finding the correct strings to
              use in the Style command.

              When the ExplainWindowPlacement option is enabled, fvwm prints a
              message to the console whenever a new window is placed or one of
              the commands PlaceAgain, Recapture or RecaptureWindow is used.
              The message explains on which desk, page, Xinerama screen and
              position it was placed and why.  This option can be used to
              figure out why a specific window does not appear where you think
              it should.

              The DebugCRMotionMethod option enables some debugging code in
              the ConfigureRequest handling routines of fvwm.  It is not
              helpful for the user, but if you report a bug to the fvwm team
              we may ask you to enable this option.

              The TransliterateUtf8 option enables transliteration during
              conversions from utf-8 strings.  By default fvwm will not
              transliterate during conversion, but will fall back to alternate
              strings provided by the clients if conversion from utf-8 fails
              due to characters which have no direct correspondence in the
              target charecter set.  Some clients however neglect to set non
              utf-8 properties correctly in which case this option may help.

       BusyCursor [Option bool], ...
              This command controls the cursor during the execution of certain
              commands.  Option can be DynamicMenu, ModuleSynchronous, Read,
              Wait or *.  An option must be followed by a boolean argument
              bool.  You can use commas to separate individual options.  If
              you set an option to "True", then when the corresponding command
              is run, fvwm displays the cursor of the WAIT context of the
              CursorStyle command.  "False" forces to not display the cursor.
              The default is:

                  BusyCursor DynamicMenu False, ModuleSynchronous False, \
                    Read False, Wait False

              The * option refers to all available options.

              The Read option controls the PipeRead command.

              The DynamicMenu option affects the DynamicPopupAction and
              MissingSubmenuFunction options of the AddToMenu command.  If
              this option is set to "False", then the busy cursor is not
              displayed during a dynamic menu command even if this command is
              a Read or PipeRead command and the Read option is set to "True".

              The ModuleSynchronous option affects the ModuleSynchronous
              command.  If this option is set to "False", then the busy cursor
              is not displayed while fvwm waits for a module started by
              ModuleSynchronous to complete its startup.

              The Wait option affects only the root cursor.  During a wait
              pause the root cursor is replaced by the busy cursor and fvwm is
              still fully functional (you can escape from the pause, see the
              EscapeFunc command).  If you want to use this option and if you
              do not use the default root cursor, you must set your root
              cursor with the CursorStyle command.

       ClickTime [delay]
              Specifies the maximum delay in milliseconds between a button
              press and a button release for the Function command to consider
              the action a mouse click.  The default delay is 150
              milliseconds.  Omitting the delay value resets the ClickTime to
              the default.

              ClickTime also specifies the delay between two clicks to be
              interpreted as a double-click.

       ColorLimit limit
              This command is obsolete.  See the --color-limit option to fvwm.

       ColormapFocus FollowsMouse | FollowsFocus
              By default, fvwm installs the colormap of the window that the
              cursor is in.  If you use

                  ColormapFocus FollowsFocus

              then the installed colormap is the one for the window that
              currently has the keyboard focus.

       CursorStyle context [num | name | None | Tiny | file [x y] [fg bg]]
              Defines a new cursor for the specified context.  Note that this
              command can not control the shapes an applications uses, for
              example, to indicate that it is busy.  The various contexts are:

              POSITION (top_left_corner)
                  used when initially placing windows

              TITLE (top_left_arrow)
                  used in a window title-bar

              DEFAULT (top_left_arrow)
                  used in windows that do not set their cursor

              SYS (hand2)
                  used in one of the title-bar buttons

              MOVE (fleur)
                  used when moving or resizing windows

              RESIZE (sizing)
                  used when moving or resizing windows

              WAIT (watch)
                  used during certain fvwm commands (see BusyCursor for
                  details)

              MENU (top_left_arrow)
                  used in menus

              SELECT (crosshair)
                  used when the user is required to select a window

              DESTROY (pirate)
                  used for Destroy, Close, and Delete commands

              TOP (top_side)
                  used in the top side-bar of a window

              RIGHT (right_side)
                  used in the right side-bar of a window

              BOTTOM (bottom_side)
                  used in the bottom side-bar of a window

              LEFT (left_side)
                  used in the left side-bar of a window

              TOP_LEFT (top_left_corner)
                  used in the top left corner of a window

              TOP_RIGHT (top_right_corner)
                  used in the top right corner of a window

              BOTTOM_LEFT (bottom_left_corner)
                  used in the bottom left corner of a window

              BOTTOM_RIGHT (bottom_right_corner)
                  used in the bottom right corner of a window

              TOP_EDGE (top_side)
                  used at the top edge of the screen

              RIGHT_EDGE (right_side)
                  used at the right edge of the screen

              BOTTOM_EDGE (bottom_side)
                  used at the bottom edge of the screen

              LEFT_EDGE (left_side)
                  used at the left edge of the screen

              ROOT (left_ptr)
                  used as the root cursor

              STROKE (plus)
                  used during a StrokeFunc command.

              The defaults are shown in parentheses above.  If you ever want
              to restore the default cursor for a specific context you can
              omit the second argument.

              The second argument is either the numeric value of the cursor as
              defined in the include file X11/cursorfont.h or its name
              (without the XC_ prefix).  Alternatively, the xpm file name may
              be specified.  The name can also be None (no cursor) or Tiny (a
              single pixel as the cursor).

                  # make the kill cursor be XC_gumby (both forms work):
                  CursorStyle DESTROY 56
                  CursorStyle DESTROY gumby

              Alternatively, the cursor can be loaded from an (XPM, PNG or
              SVG) image file.  If fvwm is compiled with Xcursor support, full
              ARGB is used, and (possibly animated) cursor files made with the
              xcursorgen program can be loaded.  Otherwise the cursor is
              converted to monochrome.

              The optional x and y arguments (following a file argument)
              specifies the hot-spot coordinate with 0 0 as the top left
              corner of the image.  Coordinates within the image boundary are
              valid and overrides any hot-spot defined in the (XPM/Xcursor)
              image file.  An invalid or undefined hot-spot is placed in the
              center of the image.

                  CursorStyle ROOT cursor_image.png 0 0

              The optional fg and bg arguments specify the foreground and
              background colors for the cursor, defaulting to black and white
              (reverse video compared to the actual bitmap).  These colors are
              only used with monochrome cursors.  Otherwise they are silently
              ignored.

                  CursorStyle ROOT nice_arrow.xpm yellow black

       DefaultColors [foreground] [background]
              DefaultColors sets the default foreground and background colors
              used in miscellaneous windows created by fvwm, for example in
              the geometry feedback windows during a move or resize operation.
              If you do not want to change one color or the other, use - as
              its color name.  To revert to the built-in default colors omit
              both color names.  Note that the default colors are not used in
              menus, window titles or icon titles.

       DefaultColorset [num]
              DefaultColorset sets the colorset used by the windows controlled
              by the DefaultColors command.  To revert back to the
              DefaultColors colors use

                  DefaultColorset -1

              or any variant of the DefaultColors command.

       DefaultFont [fontname]
              DefaultFont sets the default font to font fontname.  The default
              font is used by fvwm whenever no other font has been specified.
              To reset the default font to the built-in default, omit the
              argument.  The default font is used for menus, window titles,
              icon titles as well as the geometry feedback windows during a
              move or resize operation.  To override the default font in a
              specific context, use the Style * Font, Style * IconFont, or
              MenuStyle commands.

       DefaultIcon filename
              Sets the default icon which is used if a window has neither an
              client-supplied icon nor an icon supplied via the Icon option of
              the Style command.

       DefaultLayers bottom put top
              Changes the layers that are used for the StaysOnBottom,
              StaysPut, StaysOnTop Style options.  Initially, the layers 2, 4
              and 6 are used.

       Deschedule [command_id]
              Removes all commands that were scheduled with the id command_id
              with the Schedule command from the list of commands to be
              executed unless they were already executed.  If the command_id
              is omitted, the value of the variable $[schedule.last] is used
              as the id.

       Emulate Fvwm | Mwm | Win
              This command is a catch all for how miscellaneous things are
              done by fvwm.  Right now this command affects where the
              move/resize feedback window appears and how window placement is
              aborted.  To have more Mwm- or Win-like behavior you can call
              Emulate with Mwm or Win as its argument.  With Mwm resize and
              move feedback windows are in the center of the screen, instead
              of the upper left corner.  This also affects how manual
              placement is aborted.  See the ManualPlacement description.

       EscapeFunc
              By default the key sequence Ctrl-Alt-Escape allows for escaping
              from a Wait pause and from a locked ModuleSynchronous command.
              The EscapeFunc command used with the Key command allows for
              configuring this key sequence.  An example:

                  Key Escape A MC -
                  Key Escape A  S EscapeFunc

              replaces the Ctrl-Alt-Escape key sequence with Shift-Escape for
              aborting a Wait pause and ModuleSynchronous command.  EscapeFunc
              used outside the Key command does nothing.

       FakeClick [command value] ...
              This command is mainly intended for debugging fvwm and no
              guarantees are made that it works for you.  FakeClick can
              simulate mouse button press and release events and pass them to
              fvwm or the applications.  The parameters are a list of commands
              which consist of pairs of command tokens and integer values, The
              press and release commands are followed by the appropriate mouse
              button number and generate a button press or release event on
              the window below the pointer.  The wait commands pauses fvwm for
              the given number of milliseconds.  The modifiers command
              simulates pressing or releasing modifier keys.  The values 1 to
              5 are mapped to Mod1 to Mod5 while 6, 7 and 8 are mapped to
              Shift , Lock and Control The modifier is set for any further
              button events.  To release a modifier key, use the corresponding
              negative number.  The depth command determines to which window
              the button events are sent.  With a depth of 1, all events go to
              the root window, regardless of the pointer's position.  With 2,
              the event is passed to the top level window under the pointer
              which is usually the frame window.  With 3, events go to the
              client window.  Higher numbers go to successive sub windows.
              Zero (0) goes to the smallest window that contains the pointer.
              Note that events propagate upward.

                  FakeClick depth 2 press 1 wait 250 release 1

              This simulates a click with button 1 in the parent window (depth
              2) with a delay of 250 milliseconds between the press and the
              release.  Note: all command names can be abbreviated with their
              first letter.

       FakeKeypress [command value] ...
              This command is mainly intended for debugging fvwm and no
              guarantees are made that it works for you.  FakeKeypress can
              simulate key press and release events and pass them to fvwm or
              applications.  The parameters are a list of commands which
              consist of pairs of command tokens and values.  The press and
              release commands are followed by a key name.  The key name is a
              standard X11 key name as defined in
              /usr/include/X11/keysymdef.h, (without the XK_ prefix), or the
              keysym database /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/XKeysymDB.  The wait,
              modifiers and depth commands are the same as those used by
              FakeClick.

              Save all GVim sessions with: "Esc:w\n"

                  All (gvim) FakeKeypress press Escape \
                                          press colon \
                                          press w \
                                          press Return

              Save & exit all GVim sessions with: "Esc:wq\n"

                  All (gvim) FakeKeypress press Escape \
                                          press colon \
                                          press w \
                                          press q \
                                          press Return

              Send A to a specific window:

                  WindowId 0x3800002 FakeKeypress press A

              Note: all command names can be abbreviated with their first
              letter.

       GlobalOpts [options]
              This command is obsolete.  Please replace the global options in
              your configuration file according to the following table:

                  GlobalOpts WindowShadeShrinks
                    -->
                  Style * WindowShadeShrinks

                  GlobalOpts WindowShadeScrolls
                    -->
                  Style * WindowShadeScrolls

                  GlobalOpts SmartPlacementIsReallySmart
                    -->
                  Style * MinOverlapPlacement

                  GlobalOpts SmartPlacementIsNormal
                    -->
                  Style * TileCascadePlacement

                  GlobalOpts ClickToFocusDoesntPassClick
                    -->
                  Style * ClickToFocusPassesClickOff

                  GlobalOpts ClickToFocusPassesClick
                    -->
                  Style * ClickToFocusPassesClick

                  GlobalOpts ClickToFocusDoesntRaise
                    -->
                  Style * ClickToFocusRaisesOff

                  GlobalOpts ClickToFocusRaises
                    -->
                  Style * ClickToFocusRaises

                  GlobalOpts MouseFocusClickDoesntRaise
                    -->
                  Style * MouseFocusClickRaisesOff

                  GlobalOpts MouseFocusClickRaises
                    -->
                  Style * MouseFocusClickRaises

                  GlobalOpts NoStipledTitles
                    -->
                  Style * !StippledTitle

                  GlobalOpts StipledTitles
                    -->
                  Style * StippledTitle

                  GlobalOpts CaptureHonorsStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * CaptureHonorsStartsOnPage

                  GlobalOpts CaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * CaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage

                  GlobalOpts RecaptureHonorsStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * RecaptureHonorsStartsOnPage

                  GlobalOpts RecaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * RecaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage

                  GlobalOpts ActivePlacementHonorsStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * ManualPlacementHonorsStartsOnPage

                  GlobalOpts ActivePlacementIgnoresStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * ManualPlacementIgnoresStartsOnPage

                  GlobalOpts RaiseOverNativeWindows
                    -->
                  BugOpts RaiseOverNativeWindows on

                  GlobalOpts IgnoreNativeWindows
                    -->
                  BugOpts RaiseOverNativeWindows off


       HilightColor textcolor backgroundcolor
              This command is obsoleted by the Style options HilightFore and
              HilightBack.  Please use

                  Style * HilightFore textcolor, HilightBack backgroundcolor

              instead.

       HilightColorset [num]
              This command is obsoleted by the Style option HilightColorset.
              Please use

                  Style * HilightColorset num

              instead.

       IconFont [fontname]
              This command is obsoleted by the Style option IconFont.  Please
              use

                  Style * IconFont fontname

              instead.

       IconPath path
              This command is obsolete.  Please use ImagePath instead.

       ImagePath path
              Specifies a colon separated list of directories in which to
              search for images (both monochrome and pixmap).  To find an
              image given by a relative pathname, fvwm looks into each
              directory listed in turn, and uses the first file found.

              If a directory is given in the form "/some/dir;.ext", this means
              all images in this directory have the extension ".ext" that
              should be forced.  The original image name (that may contain
              another extension or no extension at all) is not probed, instead
              ".ext" is added or replaces the original extension.  This is
              useful, for example, if a user has some image directories with
              ".xpm" images and other image directories with the same names,
              but ".png" images.

              The path may contain environment variables such as $HOME (or
              ${HOME}).  Further, a '+' in the path is expanded to the
              previous value of the path, allowing appending or prepending to
              the path easily.

              For example:

                  ImagePath $HOME/icons:+:/usr/include/X11/bitmaps

              Note: if the FvwmM4 module is used to parse your config files,
              then m4 may want to mangle the word "include" which frequently
              shows up in the ImagePath command.  To fix this one may add

                  undefine(`include')

              prior to the ImagePath command, or better: use the -m4-prefix
              option to force all m4 directives to have a prefix of "m4_" (see
              the FvwmM4 man page).

       LocalePath path
              Specifies a colon separated list of "locale path" in which to
              search for string translations.  A locale path is constituted by
              a directory path and a text domain separated by a semicolon
              (';').  As an example the default locale path is:

                  /install_prefix/share/locale;fvwm

              where install_prefix is the fvwm installation directory.  With
              such a locale path translations are searched for in

                  /install_prefix/share/locale/lang/LC_MESSAGES/fvwm.mo

              where lang depends on the locale.  If no directory is given the
              default directory path is assumed.  If no text domain is given,
              fvwm is assumed.  Without argument the default locale path is
              restored.

              As for the ImagePath command, path may contain environment
              variables and a '+' to append or prepend the locale path easily.

              For example, the fvwm-themes package uses

                  LocalePath ";fvwm-themes:+"

              to add locale catalogs.

              The default fvwm catalog contains a few strings used by the fvwm
              executable itself (Desk and Geometry) and strings used in some
              default configuration files and FvwmForm configuration.  You can
              take a look at the po/ subdirectory of the fvwm source to get
              the list of the strings with a possible translation in various
              languages.  At present, very few languages are supported.

              The main use of locale catalogs is via the "$[gt.string]"
              parameter:

                  DestroyMenu MenuFvwmWindowOps
                  AddToMenu   MenuFvwmWindowOps "$[gt.Window Ops]" Title
                  + "$[gt.&Move]"              Move
                  + "$[gt.&Resize]"            Resize
                  + "$[gt.R&aise]"             Raise
                  + "$[gt.&Lower]"             Lower
                  + "$[gt.(De)&Iconify]"       Iconify
                  + "$[gt.(Un)&Stick]"         Stick
                  + "$[gt.(Un)Ma&ximize]"      Maximize
                  + "" Nop
                  + "$[gt.&Close]"             Close
                  + "$[gt.&Destroy]"           Destroy

              gives a menu in the locale languages if translations are
              available.

              Note that the FvwmScript module has a set of special
              instructions for string translation.  It is out of the scope of
              this discussion to explain how to build locale catalogs.  Please
              refer to the GNU gettext documentation.

       PixmapPath path
              This command is obsolete.  Please use ImagePath instead.

       PrintInfo subject [verbose]
              Print information on subject on stderr.  An optional integer
              argument verbose defines the level of information which is
              given.  The current valid subjects are:

              Colors which prints information about the colors used by fvwm.
              This useful on screens which can only display 256 (or less)
              colors at once.  If verbose is one or greater the palette used
              by fvwm is printed.  If you have a limited color palette, and
              you run out of colors, this command might be helpful.

              ImageCache which prints information about the images loaded by
              fvwm.  If verbose is one or greater all images in the cache will
              be listed together with their respective reuse.

              Locale which prints information on your locale and the fonts
              that fvwm used.  verbose can be 1 or 2.

              nls which prints information on the locale catalogs that fvwm
              used

              style which prints information on fvwm styles.  verbose can be
              1.

              bindings which prints information on all the bindings fvwm has:
              key, mouse and stroke bindings.  verbose has no effect with this
              option.

              infostore which prints information on all entries in the
              infostore, listing the key and its value.  verbose has no effect
              with this option.

       Repeat
              When the Repeat command is invoked, the last command that was
              executed by fvwm is executed again.  This happens regardless of
              whether it was triggered by user interaction, a module or by an
              X event.  Commands that are executed from a function defined
              with the Function command, from the Read or PipeRead commands or
              by a menu are not repeated.  Instead, the function, menu or the
              Read or PipeRead command is executed again.

       Schedule [Periodic] delay_ms [command_id] command
              The command is executed after about delay_ms milliseconds.  This
              may be useful in some tricky setups.  The command is executed in
              the same context window as the Schedule command.  An optional
              integer argument command_id may be given in decimal, hexadecimal
              or octal format.  This id can be used with the Deschedule
              command to remove the scheduled command before it is executed.
              If no id is given, fvwm uses negative id numbers, starting with
              -1 and decreasing by one with each use of the Schedule command.
              Note that the Schedule command and its arguments undergo the
              usual command line expansion, and, when command is finally
              executed, it is expanded again.  It may therefore be necessary
              to quote the parts of the command that must not be expanded
              twice.

              Note: A window's id as it is returned with $[w.id] can be used
              as the command_id.  Example:

                  Current Schedule 1000 $[w.id] WindowShade

              The Schedule command also supports the optional keyword Periodic
              which indicates that the command should be executed every
              delay_ms.  Example:

                  Schedule Periodic 10000 PipeRead '[ -N "$MAIL" ] && echo \
                       Echo You have mail'

              Use the Deschedule command to stop periodic commands.

       State state [bool]
              Sets, clears or toggles one of the 32 user defined states which
              are associated with each window.  The state is a number ranging
              from 0 to 31.  The states have no meaning in fvwm, but they can
              be checked in conditional commands like Next with the State
              condition.  The optional argument bool is a boolean argument.
              "True" sets the given state, while "False" clears it.  Using
              "toggle" switches to the opposite state.  If the bool argument
              is not given, the state is toggled.

       WindowFont [fontname]
              This command is obsoleted by the Style option Font.  Please use

                  Style * Font fontname

              instead.

       WindowList [(conditions)] [position] [options] [double-click-action]
              Generates a pop-up menu (and pops it up) in which the title and
              geometry of each of the windows currently on the desktop are
              shown.

              The format of the geometry part is: desk(layer): x-geometry
              sticky, where desk and layer are the corresponding numbers and
              sticky is empty or a capital S.  The geometry of iconified
              windows is shown in parentheses.  Selecting an item from the
              window list pop-up menu causes the interpreted function
              "WindowListFunc" to be run with the window id of that window
              passed in as $0.  The default "WindowListFunc" looks like this:

                  AddToFunc WindowListFunc
                  + I Iconify off
                  + I FlipFocus
                  + I Raise
                  + I WarpToWindow 5p 5p

              You can destroy the built-in "WindowListFunc" and create your
              own if these defaults do not suit you.

              The window list menu uses the "WindowList" menu style if it is
              defined (see MenuStyle command).  Otherwise the default menu
              style is used.  To switch back to the default menu style, issue
              the command

                  DestroyMenuStyle WindowList

              Example:

                  MenuStyle WindowList SelectOnRelease Meta_L

              The conditions can be used to exclude certain windows from the
              window list.  Please refer to the Current command for details.
              Only windows that match the given conditions are displayed in
              the window list.  The options below work vice versa: windows
              that would otherwise not be included in the window list can be
              selected with them.  The conditions always override the options.

              The position arguments are the same as for Menu.  The command
              double-click-action is invoked if the user double-clicks (or
              hits the key rapidly twice if the menu is bound to a key) when
              bringing the window list.  The double-click-action must be
              quoted if it consists of more than one word.

              The double-click-action is useful to define a default window if
              you have bound the window list to a key (or button) like this:

                  # Here we call an existing function, but
                  # it may be different.  See the default
                  # WindowListFunc definition earlier in this
                  # man page.
                  AddToFunc SwitchToWindow
                  + I WindowListFunc

                  Key Tab A M WindowList "Prev SwitchToWindow"

              Hitting Alt-Tab once it brings up the window list, if you hit it
              twice the focus is flipped between the current and the last
              focused window.  With the proper SelectOnRelease menu style (see
              example above) a window is selected as soon as you release the
              Alt key.

              The options passed to WindowList are separated by commas and can
              be Geometry / NoGeometry / NoGeometryWithInfo, NoDeskNum,
              NoLayer, NoNumInDeskTitle, NoCurrentDeskTitle, MaxLabelWidth
              width, TitleForAllDesks, Function funcname, Desk desknum,
              CurrentDesk, NoIcons / Icons / OnlyIcons, NoNormal / Normal /
              OnlyNormal, NoSticky / Sticky / OnlySticky, NoStickyAcrossPages
              / StickyAcrossPages / OnlyStickyAcrossPages, NoStickyAcrossDesks
              / StickyAcrossDesks / OnlyStickyAcrossDesks, NoOnTop / OnTop /
              OnlyOnTop, NoOnBottom / OnBottom / OnlyOnBottom, Layer m [n],
              UseSkipList / OnlySkipList, NoDeskSort, ReverseOrder,
              CurrentAtEnd, IconifiedAtEnd, UseIconName, Alphabetic /
              NotAlphabetic, SortByResource, SortByClass, NoHotkeys,
              SelectOnRelease.

              (Note - normal means not iconic, sticky, or on top)

              With the SortByResource option windows are alphabetically sorted
              first by resource class, then by resource name and then by
              window name (or icon name if UseIconName is specified).
              ReverseOrder also works in the expected manner.

              With the SortByClass option windows are sorted just like with
              SortByResource, but the resource name is not taken into account,
              only the resource class.

              The SelectOnRelease option works exactly like the MenuStyle
              option with the same name, but overrides the option given in a
              menu style.  By default, this option is set to the left Alt key.
              To switch it off, use SelectOnRelease without a key name.

              If you pass in a function via Function funcname, it is called
              within a window context of the selected window:

                  AddToFunc IFunc I Iconify toggle
                  WindowList Function IFunc, NoSticky, CurrentDesk, NoIcons

              If you use the Layer m [n] option, only windows in layers
              between m and n are displayed.  n defaults to m.  With the
              ReverseOrder option the order of the windows in the list is
              reversed.

              With the CurrentAtEnd option the currently focused window (if
              any) is shown at the bottom of the list.  This is mostly
              intended for simulating the Alt-Tab behavior in another GUI.

              IconifiedAtEnd makes iconified windows be moved to the end of
              the list.  This is also from another GUI.

              The NoGeometry option causes fvwm to not display the geometries
              as well as the separators which indicate the different desktops.
              NoGeometryWithInfo removes the geometries, but keep the desktop
              information and indicates iconic windows.  NoDeskNum causes fvwm
              to not display the desktop number in the geometry or before the
              window title with the NoGeometryWithInfo option.
              NoNumInDeskTitle is only useful if a desktop name is defined
              with the DesktopName command.  It causes fvwm to not display the
              desktop number before the desktop name.  By default, the
              WindowList menu have a title which indicates the current desk or
              the selected desktop if the Desk condition is used.  The
              NoCurrentDeskTitle option removes this title.  TitleForAllDesks
              causes fvwm to add a menu title with the desk name and/or number
              before each group of windows on the same desk.  With NoLayer,
              the layer of the window is not diplayed.  The options ShowPage,
              ShowPageX and ShowPageY enable displaying the page of the window
              rounded multiples of the display size.  With ShowScreen, the
              window's Xinerama screen number is displayed.

              The MaxLabelWidth option takes the number of characters to print
              as its argument.  No more than that many characters of the
              window name are visible.

              If you wanted to use the WindowList as an icon manager, you
              could invoke the following:

                  WindowList OnlyIcons, Sticky, OnTop, Geometry

              (Note - the Only options essentially wipe out all other ones...
              but the OnlyListSkip option which just causes WindowList to only
              consider the windows with WindowListSkip style.)

       XSync
              When XSync is called, the X function with the same name is used
              to send all pending X requests to the server.  This command is
              intended for debugging only.

       XSynchronize [bool]
              The XSynchronize command controls whether X requests are sent to
              the X server immediately or not.  Normally, requests are sent in
              larger batches to save unnecessary communication.  To send
              requests immediately, use "True" as the argument, to disable
              this use "False" or to toggle between both methods use "Toggle"
              or omit the bool argument.  Fvwm defaults to synchronized
              requests when started with the --debug option.  This command is
              intended for debugging only.

       +
              Used to continue adding to the last specified decor, function or
              menu.  See the discussion for AddToDecor, AddToFunc, and
              AddToMenu.

   Window Movement and Placement
       AnimatedMove x y [Warp]
              Move a window in an animated fashion.  Similar to Move command.
              The options are the same, except they are required, since it
              doesn't make sense to have a user move the window interactively
              and animatedly.  If the optional argument Warp is specified the
              pointer is warped with the window.

       HideGeometryWindow [Never | Move | Resize]
              Hides the position or size window that is usually shown when a
              window is moved or resized interactively.  To switch it off only
              for move or resize operations the optional parameters Move and
              Resize can be used respectively.  To switch both on again use
              the Never option.

       Layer [arg1 arg2] | [default]
              Puts the current window in a new layer.  If arg1 is non zero
              then the next layer is the current layer number plus arg1.  If
              arg1 is zero then the new layer is arg2.

              As a special case, default puts the window in its default layer,
              i.e. the layer it was initially in.  The same happens if no or
              invalid arguments are specified.

       Lower
              Allows the user to lower a window.  Note that this lowers a
              window only in its layer.  To bring a window to the absolute
              bottom, use

                  AddToFunc lower-to-bottom
                   + I Layer 0 0
                   + I Lower

       Move [[screen screen] [w | m]x[p | w] ... [w | m]y[p | w] ... [Warp]] |
       [pointer] | [ewmhiwa]
              Allows the user to move a window.  If called from somewhere in a
              window or its border, then that window is moved.  If called from
              the root window then the user is allowed to select the target
              window.  By default, the EWMH working area is honoured.

              If the literal option screen followed by a screen argument is
              specified, the coordinates are interpreted as relative to the
              given screen.  The width and height of the screen are used for
              the calculations instead of the display dimensions.  The screen
              as interpreted as in the MoveToScreen command.  If the optional
              argument Warp is specified the pointer is warped with the
              window.  If the single argument pointer is given, the top left
              corner of the window is moved to the pointer position before
              starting the operation; this is mainly intended for internal use
              by modules like FvwmPager.  If the optional argument ewmhiwa is
              given, then the window position will ignore the working area
              (such as ignoring any values set via EwmhBaseStruts).

              The operation can be aborted with Escape or any mouse button not
              set to place the window.  By default mouse button 2 is set to
              cancel the move operation.  To change this you may use the Mouse
              command with special context 'P' for Placement.

              The window condition PlacedByButton can be used to check if a
              specific button was pressed to place the window (see Current
              command).

              If the optional arguments x and y are provided, then the window
              is moved immediately without user interaction.  Each argument
              can specify an absolute or relative position from either the
              left/top or right/bottom of the screen.  By default, the numeric
              value given is interpreted as a percentage of the screen
              width/height, but a trailing 'p' changes the interpretation to
              mean pixels, while a trailing 'w' means precent of the window
              width/height.  To move the window relative to its current
              position, add the 'w' (for "window") prefix before the x and/or
              y value.  To move the window to a position relative to the
              current location of the pointer, add the 'm' (for "mouse")
              prefix.  To leave either coordinate unchanged, "keep" can be
              specified in place of x or y.


              For advanced uses, the arguments x and y can be used multiple
              times, but without the prefix 'm' or 'w'.  (See complex examples
              below).

              Simple Examples:

                  # Interactive move
                  Mouse 1 T A Move
                  # Move window to top left is at (10%,10%)
                  Mouse 2 T A Move 10 10
                  # Move top left to (10pixels,10pixels)
                  Mouse 3 T A Move 10p 10p

              More complex examples (these can be bound as actions to
              keystrokes, etc.; only the command is shown, though):

                  # Move window so bottom right is at bottom
                  # right of screen
                  Move -0 -0

                  # Move window so top left corner is 10 pixels
                  # off the top left screen edge
                  Move +-10 +-10

                  # Move window 5% to the right, and to the
                  # middle vertically
                  Move w+5 50

                  # Move window up 10 pixels, and so left edge
                  # is at x=40 pixels
                  Move 40p w-10p

                  # Move window to the mouse pointer location
                  Move m+0 m+0

                  # Move window to center of screen (50% of screen
                  # poition minus 50% of widow size).
                  Move 50-50w 50-50w

              Note: In order to obtain moving windows which do not snap to
              screen, with interactive move, hold down Alt whilst moving the
              window to disable snap attraction if it's defined.

              See also the AnimatedMove command.

       MoveToDesk [prev | arg1 [arg2] [min max]]
              Moves the selected window to another desktop.  The arguments are
              the same as for the GotoDesk command.  Without any arguments,
              the window is moved to the current desk.  MoveToDesk is a
              replacement for the obsolete WindowsDesk command, which can no
              longer be used.

       MoveThreshold [pixels]
              When the user presses a mouse button upon an object fvwm waits
              to see if the action is a click or a drag.  If the mouse moves
              by more than pixels pixels it is assumed to be a drag.

              Previous versions of fvwm hardwired pixels to 3, which is now
              the default value.  If pixels is negative or omitted the default
              value (which might be increased when 16000x9000 pixel displays
              become affordable) is restored.

       MoveToPage [options] [x[p | w] y[p | w]] | [prev]
              Moves the selected window to another page (x,y).  The upper left
              page is (0,0), the upper right is (M,0), where M is one less
              than the current number of horizontal pages specified in the
              DesktopSize command.  Similarly the lower left page is (0,N),
              and the lower right page is (M,N).  Negative page numbers refer
              to pages from the rightmost/lowest page.  If x and y are not
              given, the window is moved to the current page (a window that
              has the focus but is off-screen can be retrieved with this).
              Moving windows to a page relative to the current page can be
              achieved by adding a trailing 'p' after any or both numerical
              arguments.  To move the window relative to its current location,
              add a trailing 'w'.  To move a window to the previous page use
              prev as the single argument.

              Windows are usually not moved beyond desk boundaries.

              Possible options are wrapx and wrapy to wrap around the x or y
              coordinate when the window is moved beyond the border of the
              desktop.  For example, with wrapx, when the window moves past
              the right edge of the desktop, it reappears on the left edge.
              The options nodesklimitx and nodesklimity allow moving windows
              beyond the desk boundaries in x and y direction (disabling the
              wrapx and wrapy options).

              Examples:

                  # Move window to page (2,3)
                  MoveToPage 2 3

                  # Move window to lowest and rightmost page
                  MoveToPage -1 -1

                  # Move window to last page visited
                  MoveToPage prev

                  # Move window two pages to the right and one
                  # page up, wrap at desk boundaries
                  MoveToPage wrapx wrapy +2p -1p

       MoveToScreen [screen]
              Moves the selected window to another Xinerama screen.  The
              screen argument can be 'p' for the primary screen, 'c' for the
              current screen (containing the mouse pointer), 'w' for the
              screen containing the center of +the context window, 'g' for the
              global screen or the screen number itself (counting from zero).

       OpaqueMoveSize [percentage]
              Tells fvwm the maximum size window with which opaque window
              movement should be used.  The percentage is percent of the total
              screen area (may be greater than 100).  With

                  OpaqueMoveSize 0

              all windows are moved using the traditional rubber-band outline.
              With

                  OpaqueMoveSize unlimited

              or if a negative percentage is given all windows are moved as
              solid windows.  The default is

                  OpaqueMoveSize 5

              which allows small windows to be moved in an opaque manner but
              large windows are moved as rubber-bands.  If percentage is
              omitted or invalid the default value is set.  To resize windows
              in an opaque manner you can use the ResizeOpaque style.  See the
              Style command.

       PlaceAgain [Anim] [Icon]
              Causes the current window's position to be re-computed using the
              initial window placement logic.  The window is moved to where it
              would have been if it were a new window that had just appeared.
              Most useful with Smart or Clever (ReallySmart) placement.  With
              the optional argument Anim an animated move is used to place the
              window in its new position.  With the additional option Icon,
              the icon is placed again instead.

       Raise
              Allows the user to raise a window.  Note that this raises a
              window only in its layer.  To bring a window to the absolute
              top, use

                  AddToFunc raise-to-top
                   + I Layer 0 ontop
                   + I Raise

              where ontop is the highest layer used in your setup.

       RaiseLower
              Alternately raises and lowers a window.  The window is raised if
              it is obscured by any window (except for its own transients when
              RaiseTransient style is used; see the Style command) otherwise
              it is lowered.

       Resize [[frame] [direction dir] [warptoborder automatic]
       [fixeddirection] [w]width[p | c | wa | da] [w]height[p | c]]
              Allows for resizing a window.  If called from somewhere in a
              window or its border, then that window is resized.  If called
              from the root window then the user is allowed to select the
              target window.

              The operation can be aborted with Escape or by pressing any
              mouse button (except button 1 which confirms it).

              If the optional arguments width and height are provided, then
              the window is resized so that its dimensions are width by
              height.  The units of width and height are percent-of-screen,
              unless a letter 'p' is appended to one or both coordinates, in
              which case the location is specified in pixels.  With a 'c'
              suffix the unit defined by the client application (hence the c)
              is used.  With the suffix 'wa' the value is a percentage of the
              width or height size of the EWMH working area, and with the
              suffix 'da' it is a percentage of the width or height of the
              EWMH dynamic working area.  So you can say

                  Resize 80c 24c

              to make a terminal window just big enough for 80x24 characters.

              If the width or height is prefixed with the letter 'w' the size
              is not taken as an absolute value but added to the current size
              of the window.  Example:

                  # Enlarge window by one line
                  Resize keep w+1c

              Both, width and height can be negative.  In this case the new
              size is the screen size minus the given value.  If either value
              is "keep", the corresponding dimension of the window is left
              untouched.  The new size is the size of the client window, thus

                  Resize 100 100

              may make the window bigger than the screen.  To base the new
              size on the size of the whole fvwm window, add the frame option
              after the command.  The options fixeddirection, direction and
              warptoborder are only used in interactive move operations.  With
              fixeddirection the same border is moved even if the pointer
              moves past the opposite border.  The direction option must be
              followed by a direction name such as "NorthWest", "South" or
              "East" (you get the idea).  Resizing is started immediately,
              even if the pointer is not on a border.  If the special option
              automatic is given as a direction argument, then the direction
              to resize is calculated based on the position of the pointer in
              the window.  If the pointer is in the middle of the window, then
              no direction is calculated.  The warptoborder option can be used
              to warp the pointer to the direction indicated.  As with the
              automatic option for direction, the border to warp to is
              calculated based on the pointer's proximity to a given border.
              Also, if resizing is started by clicking on the window border,
              the pointer is warped to the outer edge of the border.

                  AddToFunc ResizeSE I Resize Direction SE
                  Mouse 3 A M ResizeSE

       Resize [bottomright | br x y]
              An alternate syntax is used if the keyword bottomright or in
              short br follows the command name.  In this case, the arguments
              x and y specify the desired position of the bottom right corner
              of the window.  They are interpreted exactly like the x and y
              arguments of the Move command.  Actually, any of the options
              accepted by the Move command can be used.

       ResizeMaximize [resize-arguments]
              Combines the effects of Resize and Maximize in a single command.
              When used on a maximized window, the window is resized and is
              still in the maximized state afterwards.  When used on an
              unmaximized window, the window is resized and put into the
              maximized state afterwards.  This is useful if the user wants to
              resize the window temporarily and then return to the original
              geometry.  The resize-arguments are the same as for the Resize
              command.

       ResizeMove resize-arguments move-arguments
              This command does the same as the Resize and Move commands, but
              in a single call which is less visually disturbing.  The
              resize-arguments are exactly the same arguments as for the
              Resize command and the move-arguments are exactly the same
              arguments as for the Move command except the pointer option
              which is not supported by the ResizeMove command.

              Examples:

                  # Move window to top left corner and cover
                  # most of the screen
                  ResizeMove -10p -20p 0 0

                  # Grow the focused window towards the top of screen
                  Current Resize keep w+$[w.y]p keep 0

              Note: Fvwm may not be able to parse the command properly if the
              option bottomright of the Resize command is used.

       ResizeMoveMaximize resize-arguments move-arguments
              Combines the effects of ResizeMove and Maximize in a single
              command.  When used on a maximized window, the window is resized
              and moved and is still in the maximized state afterwards.  When
              used on an unmaximized window, the window is resized and put
              into the maximized state afterwards.  This is useful if the user
              wants to resize the window temporarily and then return to the
              original geometry.  The resize-arguments and move-arguments are
              the same as for the ResizeMove command.

       RestackTransients
              This command regroups the transients of a window close to it in
              the stacking order as if the window had just been lowered and
              then raised.  The position of the window itself is not altered.
              Only windows that use either the RaiseTransient or
              LowerTransient style are affected at all.  When
              RestackTransients is used on a transient window with the
              StackTransientParent style set, it is redirected to the parent
              window.

       SetAnimation milliseconds-delay [fractions-to-move-list]
              Sets the time between frames and the list of fractional offsets
              to customize the animated moves of the AnimatedMove command and
              the animation of menus (if the menu style is set to animated;
              see MenuStyle command).  If the fractions-to-move-list is
              omitted, only the time between frames is altered.  The
              fractions-to-move-list specifies how far the window should be
              offset at each successive frame as a fraction of the difference
              between the starting location and the ending location.  e.g.:

                  SetAnimation 10 -.01 0 .01 .03 .08 .18 .3 \
                    .45 .6 .75 .85 .90 .94 .97 .99 1.0

              Sets the delay between frames to 10 milliseconds, and sets the
              positions of the 16 frames of the animation motion.  Negative
              values are allowed, and in particular can be used to make the
              motion appear more cartoonish, by briefly moving slightly in the
              opposite direction of the main motion.  The above settings are
              the default.

       SnapAttraction [proximity [behaviour] [Screen]]
              The SnapAttraction command is obsolete.  It has been replaced by
              the Style command option SnapAttraction.

       SnapGrid [x-grid-size y-grid-size]
              The SnapGrid command is obsolete.  It has been replaced by the
              Style command option SnapGrid.

       WindowsDesk arg1 [arg2]
              Moves the selected window to another desktop.

              This command has been removed and must be replaced by
              MoveToDesk, the arguments for which are the same as for the
              GotoDesk command.

              Important
              You cannot simply change the name of the command: the syntax has
              changed.  If you used:


                  WindowsDesk n

              to move a window to desk n, you have to change it to:

                  MoveToDesk 0 n

       XorPixmap [pixmap]
              Selects the pixmap with which bits are xor'ed when doing
              rubber-band window moving or resizing.  This has a better chance
              of making the rubber-band visible if XorValue does not give good
              results.  An example pixmap resize.rainbow.xpm is provided with
              the icon distribution.  To turn the XorPixmap off again use the
              XorValue command or omit the pixmap argument.

       XorValue [number]
              Changes the value with which bits are xor'ed when doing
              rubber-band window moving or resizing.  Valid values range from
              zero to the maximum value of an unsigned long integer on your
              system.  Setting this value is a trial-and-error process.  The
              default value 0 tries to find a value that gives a good contrast
              to black and white.  The default value is used if the given
              number is omitted or invalid.

   Focus & Mouse Movement
       CursorMove horizontal[p] vertical[p]
              Moves the mouse pointer by horizontal pages in the X direction
              and vertical pages in the Y direction.  Either or both entries
              may be negative.  Both horizontal and vertical values are
              expressed in percent of pages, so

                  CursorMove 100 100

              means to move down and right by one full page.

                  CursorMove 50 25

              means to move right half a page and down a quarter of a page.
              Alternatively, the distance can be specified in pixels by
              appending a 'p' to the horizontal and/or vertical specification.
              For example

                  CursorMove -10p -10p

              means move ten pixels up and ten pixels left.  The CursorMove
              function should not be called from pop-up menus.

       FlipFocus [NoWarp]
              Executes a Focus command as if the user had used the pointer to
              select the window.  This command alters the order of the
              WindowList in the same way as clicking in a window to focus,
              i.e. the target window is removed from the WindowList and placed
              at the start.  This command is recommended for use with the
              Direction command and in the function invoked from WindowList.

       Focus [NoWarp]
              Sets the keyboard focus to the selected window.  If the NoWarp
              argument is given, this is all it does.  Otherwise it also moves
              the viewport or window as needed to make the selected window
              visible.  This command does not automatically raise the window.
              Does not warp the pointer into the selected window (see
              WarpToWindow function).  Does not de-iconify.  This command does
              not alter the order of the WindowList, it rotates the WindowList
              around so that the target window is at the start.

              When the NoWarp argument is given, Focus cannot transfer the
              keyboard focus to windows on other desks.

              To raise and/or warp a pointer to a window together with Focus
              or FlipFocus, use a function, like:

                  AddToFunc SelectWindow
                  + I Focus
                  + I Iconify false
                  + I Raise
                  + I WarpToWindow 50 8p

       WarpToWindow [!raise | raise] x[p] y[p]
              Warps the cursor to the associated window and raises it (unless
              the option !raise is present).  The parameters x and y default
              to percentage of window down and in from the upper left hand
              corner (or number of pixels down and in if 'p' is appended to
              the numbers).  If a number is negative the opposite edge is used
              and the direction reversed.  This command works also with
              windows that are not managed by fvwm.  In this case fvwm does
              not bring the window onto the screen if it is not visible.  For
              example it is possible to warp the pointer to the center of the
              root window on screen 1:

                  WindowId root 1 WarpToWindow 50 50

   Window State
       Close
              If the window accepts the delete window protocol a message is
              sent to the window asking it to gracefully remove itself.  If
              the window does not understand the delete window protocol then
              the window is destroyed as with the Destroy command.  Note: if
              the window accepts the delete window protocol but does not close
              itself in response, the window is not deleted.

       Delete
              Sends a message to a window asking that it remove itself,
              frequently causing the application to exit.

       Destroy
              Destroys an application window, which usually causes the
              application to crash and burn.

       Iconify [bool]
              Iconifies a window if it is not already iconified or
              de-iconifies it if it is already iconified.  The optional
              argument bool is a boolean argument.  "True" means only
              iconification is allowed, while "False" forces de-iconification.
              Using "toggle" switches between iconified and de-iconified
              states.

              There are a number of Style options which influence the
              appearance and behavior of icons (e.g.  StickyIcon, NoIcon).

              For backward compatibility, the optional argument may also be a
              positive number instead of "True", or a negative number instead
              of "False".  Note that this syntax is obsolete, and will be
              removed in the future.

       Maximize [flags] [bool | forget] [horizontal[p]] [vertical[p]]
              Without its optional arguments (or if the bool bit has the value
              "toggle") Maximize causes the window to alternately switch from
              a full-screen size to its normal size.  To force a window into
              maximized (normal) state you can use a "True" or "False" value
              for the bool argument.

              With just the parameter "forget" a maximized window reverts back
              into normal state but keeps its current maximized size.  This
              can be useful in conjunction with the commands ResizeMaximize
              and ResizeMoveMaximize.  If the window is not maximized, nothing
              happens.

              With the optional arguments horizontal and vertical, which are
              expressed as percentage of a full screen, the user can control
              the new size of the window.  An optional suffix 'p' can be used
              to indicate pixels instead of percents of the screen size.  If
              horizontal is greater than 0 then the horizontal dimension of
              the window is set to horizontal*screen_width/100.  If the value
              is smaller than 0 the size is subtracted from the screen width,
              i.e. -25 is the same as 75.  If horizontal is "grow", it is
              maximized to curren available space until finding any obstacle.
              The vertical resizing is similar.  If both horizontal and
              vertical values are "grow", it expands vertically first, then
              horizontally to find space.  Instead of the horizontal "grow"
              argument, "growleft" or "growright" can be used respectively
              "growup" and "growdown".  The optional flags argument is a space
              separated list containing the following key words: fullscreen,
              ewmhiwa, growonwindowlayer, growonlayers and screen.  fullscreen
              causes the window to become fullscreened if the appropriate EWMH
              hint is set.  ewmhiwa causes fvwm to ignore the EWMH working
              area.  growonwindowlayer causes the various grow methods to
              ignore windows with a layer other than the current layer of the
              window which is maximized.  The growonlayers option must have
              two integer arguments.  The first one is the minimum layer and
              the second one the maximum layer to use.  Windows that are
              outside of this range of layers are ignored by the grow methods.
              A negative value as the first or second argument means to assume
              no minimum or maximum layer.  screen must have an argument which
              specifies the Xinerama screen on which to operate.  It can be
              'p' for the primary screen, 'c' for the current screen
              (containing the mouse pointer), 'g' for the global screen or the
              screen number itself (counting from zero).  This option is only
              useful with multiple Xinerama screens.

              Here are some examples.  The following adds a title-bar button
              to switch a window to the full vertical size of the screen:

                  Mouse 0 4 A Maximize 0 100

              The following causes windows to be stretched to the full width:

                  Mouse 0 4 A Maximize 100 0

              This makes a window that is half the screen size in each
              direction:

                  Mouse 0 4 A Maximize 50 50

              To expand a window horizontally until any other window is found:

                  Mouse 0 4 A Maximize 0 grow

              To expand a window until any other window on the same or a
              higher layer is hit.

                  Mouse 0 4 A Maximize growonlayers $[w.layer] -1 grow grow

              To expand a window but leave the lower 60 pixels of the screen
              unoccupied:

                  Mouse 0 4 A Maximize 100 -60p

              Values larger than 100 can be used with caution.

       Recapture
              This command is obsolete and should not be used anymore.  Should
              you want to do something specific that you cannot do without it,
              please report this to the fvwm-workers mailing list
              <fvwm-workers@fvwm.org>.  This command may be removed at some
              point in the future.  Please read the note at the end of the
              section Delayed Execution of Commands to learn about how to
              avoid the Recapture command.

              Causes fvwm to recapture all of its windows.  This ensures that
              the latest style parameters are used.  The recapture operation
              is visually disturbing.

              Since fvwm version 2.4 only a very few Style options need a
              Recapture to take effect (e.g.  UseStyle).

       RecaptureWindow
              This command is obsolete and should not be used anymore.  See
              Recapture For details.

              Causes fvwm to recapture the chosen window.

       Refresh
              Causes all windows on the screen to redraw themselves.  All
              pending updates of all windows' styles and looks are applied
              immediately.  E.g. if Style or TitleStyle commands were issued
              inside a fvwm function.

       RefreshWindow
              Causes the chosen window to redraw itself.  All pending updates
              of the window's style and look are applied immediately.  E.g. if
              Style or TitleStyle commands were issued inside a fvwm function.

       Stick [bool]
              If the bool argument is empty or "toggle", the Stick command
              makes a window sticky if it is not already sticky, or non-sticky
              if it is already sticky.  To make a window sticky regardless of
              its current state the bool argument must be "True".  To make it
              non-sticky use "False".

       StickAcrossPages [bool]
              Works like Stick but only sticks a window across pages, not
              across desks.

       StickAcrossDesks [bool]
              Works like Stick but only sticks a window across desks, not
              across pages.

       WindowShade [bool] | [[ShadeAgain] direction]
              Toggles the window shade feature for titled windows.  Windows in
              the shaded state only display a title-bar.  If bool is not given
              or "toggle", the window shade state is toggled.  If bool is
              "True", the window is forced to the shaded state.  If bool is
              "False", then the window is forced to the non-shaded state.  To
              force shading in a certain direction, the direction argument can
              be used.  Any of the strings "North", "South", "West", "East",
              "NorthWest", "NorthEast", "SouthWest", "SouthEast" or "Last" can
              be given.  The direction can be abbreviated with the usual one
              or two letters "N", "NW", etc.  Using a direction on a window
              that was already shaded unshades the window.  To shade it in a
              different direction, use the ShadeAgain option.  The direction
              Last shades the window in the direction it last was shaded.  If
              the window has never been shaded before it is shaded as if no
              direction had been given.  Windows without titles can be shaded
              too.  Please refer also to the options WindowShadeSteps,
              WindowShadeShrinks, WindowShadeScrolls, WindowShadeLazy,
              WindowShadeAlwaysLazy and WindowShadeBusy options of the Style
              command.  Examples:

                  Style * WindowShadeShrinks, WindowShadeSteps 20, \
                          WindowShadeLazy
                  Mouse 1 - S WindowShade North
                  Mouse 1 [ S WindowShade West
                  Mouse 1 ] S WindowShade E
                  Mouse 1 _ S WindowShade S

              Note: When a window that has been shaded with a direction
              argument changes the direction of the window title (see
              TitleAtTop Style option), the shading direction does not change.
              This may look very strange.  Windows that were shaded without a
              direction argument stay shaded in the direction of the title
              bar.

              For backward compatibility, the optional argument may also be 1
              to signify "on", and 2 to signify "off".  Note that this syntax
              is obsolete, and will be removed in the future.

       WindowShadeAnimate [steps [p]]
              This command is obsolete.  Please use the WindowShadeSteps
              option of the Style command instead.

   Mouse, Key & Stroke Bindings
       IgnoreModifiers [Modifiers]
              Tells fvwm which modifiers to ignore when matching Mouse or Key
              bindings.  IgnoreModifiers affects the ClickToFocus style too.
              This command belongs into your config.  If you issue it when
              your fvwm session is already up and running the results are
              unpredictable.  The should appear before any applications or
              modules are started in your config file (e.g. with the Exec
              command).

              Modifiers has the same syntax as in the Mouse or Key bindings,
              with the addition of 'L' meaning the caps lock key.  The default
              is "L".  Modifiers can be omitted, meaning no modifiers are
              ignored.  This command comes in handy if the num-lock and
              scroll-lock keys interfere with your shortcuts.  With XFree86
              '2' usually is the num-lock modifier and '5' refers to the
              scroll-lock key.  To turn all these pesky modifiers off you can
              use this command:

                  IgnoreModifiers L25

              If the Modifiers argument is the string "default", fvwm reverts
              back to the default value "L".

              Important
              This command creates a lot of extra network traffic, depending
              on your CPU, network connection, the number of Key or Mouse
              commands in your configuration file and the number of modifiers
              you want to ignore.  If you do not have a lightning fast machine
              or very few bindings you should not ignore more than two
              modifiers.  I.e. do not ignore scroll-lock if you have no
              problem with it.  In the FAQ you can find a better solution of
              this problem.

       EdgeCommand [direction [Function]]
              Binds a specified fvwm command Function to an edge of the
              screen.  Direction may be one of "North", "Top", "West", "Left",
              "South", "Bottom", "Right" and "East".  If Function is omitted
              the binding for this edge is removed.  If EdgeCommand is called
              without any arguments all edge bindings are removed.

              Function is executed when the mouse pointer enters the invisible
              pan frames that surround the visible screen.  The binding works
              only if EdgeThickness is set to a value greater than 0.  If a
              function is bound to an edge, scrolling specified by EdgeScroll
              is disabled for this edge.  It is possible to bind a function
              only to some edges and use the other edges for scrolling.  This
              command is intended to raise or lower certain windows when the
              mouse pointer enters an edge.  FvwmAuto can be used get a delay
              when raising or lowering windows.  The following example raises
              FvwmButtons if the mouse pointer enters the top edge of the
              screen.

                  # Disable EdgeScrolling but make it possible
                  # to move windows over the screen edge
                  EdgeResistance -1
                  Style * EdgeMoveDelay 250
                  Style * EdgeMoveResistance 20

                  # Set thickness of the edge of the screen to 1
                  EdgeThickness 1

                  # Give focus to FvwmButtons if the mouse
                  # hits top edge
                  EdgeCommand Top Next (FvwmButtons) Focus
                  # Make sure the Next command matches the window
                  Style FvwmButtons CirculateHit

                  Module FvwmButtons
                  Module FvwmAuto 100 "Silent AutoRaiseFunction" \
                       "Silent AutoLowerFunction"

                  # If any window except FvwmButtons has
                  # focus when calling this function
                  # FvwmButtons are lowered
                  DestroyFunc AutoLowerFunction
                  AddToFunc AutoLowerFunction
                  + I Current (!FvwmButtons) All (FvwmButtons) Lower

                  # If FvwmButtons has focus when calling this function raise it
                  DestroyFunc AutoRaiseFunction
                  AddToFunc AutoRaiseFunction
                  + I Current (FvwmButtons) Raise

              Normally, the invisible pan frames are only on the screen edges
              that border virtual pages.  If a screen edge has a command bound
              to it, the pan frame is always created on that edge.

       EdgeLeaveCommand [direction [Function]]
              Binds a specified fvwm command Function to an edge of the
              screen.  Direction may be one of "North", "Top", "West", "Left",
              "South", "Bottom", "Right" and "East".  If Function is omitted
              the binding for this edge is removed.  If EdgeLeaveCommand is
              called without any arguments all edge bindings are removed.

              Function is executed when the mouse pointer leaves the invisible
              pan frames that surround the visible screen.  The binding works
              only if EdgeThickness is set to a value greater than 0.  If a
              function is bound to an edge, scrolling specified by EdgeScroll
              is disabled for this edge.  It is possible to bind a function
              only to some edges and use the other edges for scrolling.  This
              command is intended to raise or lower certain windows when the
              mouse pointer leaves an edge.  FvwmAuto can be used get a delay
              when raising or lowering windows.  See example for EdgeCommand

              Normally, the invisible pan frames are only on the screen edges
              that border virtual pages.  If a screen edge has a command bound
              to it, the pan frame is always created on that edge.

       Key [(window)] Keyname Context Modifiers Function
              Binds a keyboard key to a specified fvwm command, or removes the
              binding if Function is '-'.  The syntax is the same as for a
              Mouse binding except that the mouse button number is replaced
              with a Keyname.  Normally, the key binding is activated when the
              key is pressed.  Keyname is a standard X11 key name as defined
              in /usr/include/X11/keysymdef.h, (without the XK_ prefix), or
              the keysym database /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/XKeysymDB.  Only key
              names that are generated with no modifier keys or with just the
              Shift key held are guaranteed to work.  The Context and
              Modifiers fields are defined as in the Mouse binding.  However,
              when you press a key the context window is the window that has
              the keyboard focus.  That is not necessarily the same as the
              window the pointer is over (with SloppyFocus or ClickToFocus).
              Note that key bindings with the 'R' (root window) context do not
              work properly with SloppyFocus and ClickToFocus.  If you
              encounter problems, use the PointerKey command instead.  If you
              want to bind keys to a window with SloppyFocus or ClickToFocus
              that are supposed to work when the pointer is not over the
              window, fvwm assumes the pointer is over the client window (i.e.
              you have to use the 'W' context).

              The special context 'M' for menus can be used to (re)define the
              menu controls.  It be used alone or together with 'T', 'S', 'I',
              '[', ']', '-' and '_'.  See the Menu Bindings section for
              details.

              The following example binds the built-in window list to pop up
              when Alt-Ctrl-Shift-F11 is hit, no matter where the mouse
              pointer is:

                  Key F11 A SCM WindowList

              Binding a key to a title-bar button causes that button to
              appear.  Please refer to the Mouse command for details.

       Mouse [(window)] Button Context Modifiers Function
              Defines a mouse binding, or removes the binding if Function is
              '-'.  Button is the mouse button number.  If Button is zero then
              any button performs the specified function.  Note that only
              mouse buttons 1 to 5 are fully supported by X11.  Any number
              above this works only partially.  Complex functions can not be
              used with these buttons and neither any operation that requires
              dragging the pointer with the button held.  This is due to
              limitations of X11.  By default, the highest allowed button
              number is 9.

              Context describes where the binding applies.  Valid contexts are
              'R' for the root window, 'W' for an application window, 'D' for
              a desktop application (as kdesktop or Nautilus desktop), 'T' for
              a window title-bar, 'S' for a window side, top, or bottom bar,
              '[', ']', '-' and '_' for the left, right, top or bottom side
              only, 'F' for a window frame (the corners), '<', '^', '>' and
              'v' for the top left, top right, bottom right or bottom left
              corner, 'I' for an icon window, or '0' through '9' for title-bar
              buttons, or any combination of these letters.  'A' is for any
              context.  For instance, a context of "FST" applies when the
              mouse is anywhere in a window's border except the title-bar
              buttons.  Only 'S' and 'W' are valid for an undecorated window.

              The special context 'M' for menus can be used to (re)define the
              menu controls.  It can be used alone or together with 'T', 'S',
              'I', '[', ']', '-' and '_'.  See the Menu Bindings section for
              details.

              The special context 'P' controls what buttons that can be used
              to place a window.  When using this context no modifiers are
              allowed (Modifiers must be N), no window is allowed, and the
              Function must be one of PlaceWindow, PlaceWindowDrag,
              PlaceWindowInteractive, CancelPlacement, CancelPlacementDrag,
              CancelPlacementInteractive or -.

              PlaceWindow makes Button usable for window placement, both for
              interactive and drag move.  CancelPlacement does the inverse.
              That is makes Button to cancel move for both interactive and
              drag move.  It may however not override how new windows are
              resized after being placed.  This is controlled by the Emulate
              command.  Also a window being dragged can always be placed by
              releasing the button hold while dragging, regardless of if it is
              set to PlaceWindow or not.

              PlaceWindowDrag and PlaceWindowInteractive/CancelPlacementDrag
              and CancelPlacementInteractive work as
              PlaceWindow/CancelPlacement with the exception that they only
              affect either windows dragged / placed interactively.

              - is equivalent to CancelPlacement.

              The following example makes all buttons but button 3 usable for
              interactive placement and makes drag moves started by other
              buttons than one cancel if button 1 is pressed before finishing
              the move:

                  Mouse 0 P N PlaceWindow
                  Mouse 3 P N CancelPlacement
                  Mouse 1 P N CancelPlacementDrag

              By default, the binding applies to all windows.  You can specify
              that a binding only applies to specific windows by specifying
              the window name in brackets.  The window name is a wildcard
              pattern specifying the class, resource or name of the window you
              want the binding to apply to.

              The following example shows how the same key-binding can be used
              to perform different functions depending on the window that is
              focused:

                  Key (rxvt)  V A C Echo ctrl-V-in-RXVT
                  Key (*term) V A C Echo ctrl-V-in-Term
                  Key (*vim)  V A C --
                  Key         V A C Echo ctrl-V-elsewhere

              A '--' action indicates that the event should be propagated to
              the specified window to handle.  This is only a valid action for
              window-specific bindings.

              This example shows how to display the WindowList when Button 3
              is pressed on an rxvt window:

                  Mouse (rxvt) 3 A A WindowList

              Note that Fvwm actually intercepts all events for a
              window-specific binding and (if the focused window doesn't match
              any of the bindings) sends a synthetic copy of the event to the
              window.  This should be transparent to most applications,
              however (for security reasons) some programs ignore these
              synthetic events by default - xterm is one of them.  To enable
              handling of these events, add the following line to your
              ~/.Xdefaults file:

                  XTerm*allowSendEvents:  true

              Modifiers is any combination of 'N' for no modifiers, 'C' for
              control, 'S' for shift, 'M' for Meta, 'L' for Caps-Lock or 'A'
              for any modifier.  For example, a modifier of "SM" applies when
              both the Meta and Shift keys are down.  X11 modifiers mod1
              through mod5 are represented as the digits '1' through '5'.  The
              modifier 'L' is ignored by default.  To turn it on, use the
              IgnoreModifiers command.

              Function is one of fvwm's commands.

              The title-bar buttons are numbered with odd numbered buttons on
              the left side of the title-bar and even numbers on the right.
              Smaller-numbered buttons are displayed toward the outside of the
              window while larger-numbered buttons appear toward the middle of
              the window (0 is short for 10).  In summary, the buttons are
              numbered:

                  1 3 5 7 9    0 8 6 4 2

              The highest odd numbered button which has an action bound to it
              determines the number of buttons drawn on the left side of the
              title bar.  The highest even number determines the number of
              right side buttons which are drawn.  Actions can be bound to
              either mouse buttons or keyboard keys.

       PointerKey [(window)] Keyname Context Modifiers Function
              This command works exactly like the Key command.  The only
              difference is that the binding operates on the window under the
              pointer.  Normal key bindings operate on the focused window
              instead.  The PointerKey command can for example be used to bind
              keys to the root window if you are using SloppyFocus or
              ClickToFocus.  However, some applications (xterm is one example)
              are unable to handle this key anymore, even if the pointer is
              over the xterm window.  It is recommended to use the PointerKey
              command only for key combinations that are not needed in any
              application window.

              Example:

                  Style * SloppyFocus
                  PointerKey f1 a m Menu MainMenu

       Stroke [(window)] Sequence Button Context Modifiers Function
              Binds a mouse stroke sequence to a specified fvwm command, or
              removes the binding if Function is '-'.  The syntax is the same
              as for a Mouse binding except that Sequence is inserted in front
              of the button number and a value of 0 for Button concerns the
              StrokeFunc command.  The Context and Modifiers fields are
              defined as in the Mouse binding.  However, only the 'R' Context
              really works (if you want to use other contexts you need to use
              the StrokeFunc below).

              Strokes sequences are defined in a telephone grid like this:

                   1  2  3

                   4  5  6

                   7  8  9

              or in a numeric pad grid like this:

                   7  8  9

                   4  5  6

                   1  2  3

              The telephone grid is used by default, to use the numeric pad
              grid you should begin the sequence with a 'N'.  Note that a
              complex motion may produce several different sequences (see the
              "netscape" example below to handle such motion).  Moreover,
              sequences are limited to 20 elements (with the present version
              of libstroke), however, in practice it is preferable to use
              sequence with less than 12 elements.

              Because of the default button menu in fvwm, you may need to
              remove a mouse button binding (using an empty action) before
              using the stroke

                  Mouse 3 R N

              Also, you can still use the stroke "sequence 0" to simulate a
              click:

                  Stroke 0 3 R N Menu WindowList Nop

              The following example starts xterm when the mouse drags an 'I'
              on the root window with button 3 pressed down:

                  Stroke 258  3  R  N  Exec exec xterm

              An example for Netscape:

                  Stroke 7415963    3  R  N  Exec exec netscape
                  Stroke 74148963   3  R  N  Exec exec netscape
                  Stroke 74158963   3  R  N  Exec exec netscape
                  Stroke 7418963    3  R  N  Exec exec netscape
                  Stroke 415963     3  R  N  Exec exec netscape

              You may prefer to use the numeric pad grid since you have such a
              grid on your machine.  Here an example:

                  Stroke N78963214   3  R  N FvwmForm FvwmForm-QuitVerify
                  Stroke N789632147  3  R  N FvwmForm FvwmForm-QuitVerify

              This example starts the "QuitVerify" form if you draw a box that
              begins in the top left corner.

              Note: You need libstroke installed and fvwm compiled with stroke
              support.  libstroke can be obtained at
              http://www.etla.net/~willey/projects/libstroke/

       StrokeFunc [Options]
              Causes fvwm to record a mouse stroke sequence and to execute the
              corresponding action as defined in a Stroke command.  The cursor
              is modified to the STROKE context of the CursorStyle command
              during recording.  When the stroke is finished StrokeFunc looks
              for a stroke binding of the form

                  Stroke sequence 0 Context Modifiers action

              and executes the corresponding action (Note the 0).  Normal use
              of this function is via a Mouse or Key command.  Examples:

                  Mouse 3 A M StrokeFunc
                  Key x R N StrokeFunc

              If you press mouse button 3 and Alt anywhere (respectively,
              press the key x when the cursor is on the root window), then
              fvwm records the mouse motions until the mouse button 3
              (respectively, the x key) is released and then check if the
              recorded sequence corresponds to a stroke binding of the form

                  "Stroke sequence 0 A M action"
                  "Stroke sequence 0 R N action"

              Note that the Context and Modifiers are taken at the beginning
              of the execution of the StrokeFunc command (so you can release
              the modifiers before the end of the stroke recording in the case
              of a mouse binding and if you used, say, a title-bar context the
              mouse motion can go through an application window).  The keys
              Escape and Delete allow you to abort the command.

              The StrokeFunc command has five options: NotStayPressed,
              EchoSequence, DrawMotion, FeedBack and StrokeWidth.  These
              options are disabled by default.  EchoSequence causes fvwm to
              Echo the recorded stroke sequence.  DrawMotion causes fvwm to
              draw the mouse motion on the screen.  FeedBack causes fvwm to
              display during a fraction of second the cursor of the WAIT
              context of the CursorStyle command if the recorded stroke
              sequence corresponds to a stroke binding.  StrokeWidth takes an
              integer argument, which must be >= 0 and <= 100 and which
              defines the width of the line for the DrawMotion option.

              NotStayPressed works only if StrokeFunc is used via a Mouse or a
              Key command.  This option removes the need to have a button or
              the key pressed during the stroke, but you have to do a mouse
              click or press the Return or Space key to finish the mouse
              motion recording (these keys also work without the
              NotStayPressed option).

              You can use the StrokeFunc "alone".  In this case it works as
              above with the NotStayPressed option enabled.  However,
              Modifiers, in general, may not work as expected (i.e., in this
              case use 'A' or 'N' as Modifiers in the stroke bindings).

              Note that some computers do not support key release events.  If
              that is the case the StrokeFunc used via a Key command works as
              if the NotStayPressed option is enabled.

   Controlling Window Styles
       For readability, the commands in this section are not sorted
       alphabetically.  The description of the Style command can be found at
       the end of this section.

       FocusStyle stylename options
              works exactly like the Style command, but accepts only the focus
              policy related styles beginning with "FP".  The prefix can be
              removed, but at the cost of a little bit of time.  FocusStyle is
              meant to make the configuration file more readable.  Example:

                  FocusStyle * EnterToFocus, !LeaveToUnfocus

              is equivalent to

                  Style * FPEnterToFocus, !FPLeaveToUnfocus

       DestroyStyle style
              deletes the style named style.  The changes take effect
              immediately.  Note that style is not a wild-carded search
              string, but rather a case-sensitive string that should exactly
              match the original Style command.

              Destroying style "*" can be done, but isn't really to be
              recommended.  For example:

                  DestroyStyle Application*

              This removes all settings for the style named "Application*",
              NOT all styles starting with "Application".

       DestroyWindowStyle
              deletes the styles set by the WindowStyle command on the
              selected window.  The changes take effect immediately.

       UpdateStyles
              All pending updates of all windows' styles and looks are applied
              immediately.  E.g. if Style, WindowStyle or TitleStyle commands
              were issued inside a fvwm function.

       Style stylename options ...
              The Style command is used to set attributes of a window to
              values other than the default or to set the window manager
              default styles.

              stylename can be a window's name, class, visible name, or
              resource string.  It may contain the wildcards '*' and '?',
              which are matched in the usual Unix filename manner.  Multiple
              style options in a single Style command are read from left to
              right as if they were issued one after each other in separate
              commands.  A given style always overrides all conflicting styles
              that have been issued earlier (or further left on the same style
              line).

              Note: windows that have no name (WM_NAME) are given a name of
              "Untitled", and windows that do not have a class (WM_CLASS,
              res_class) are given class "NoClass" and those that do not have
              a resource (WM_CLASS, res_name) are given resource "NoResource".

              If a window has the resource "fvwmstyle" set, the value of that
              resource is used in addition to any window names when selecting
              the style.

              options is a comma separated list containing one or more of the
              following keywords.  Each group of style names is separated by
              slashes ('/').  The last style in these groups is the default.
              BorderWidth, HandleWidth, !Icon / Icon, MiniIcon, IconBox,
              IconGrid, IconFill, IconSize, !Title / Title, TitleAtBottom /
              TitleAtLeft / TitleAtRight / TitleAtTop, LeftTitleRotatedCW /
              LeftTitleRotatedCCW, RightTitleRotatedCCW / RightTitleRotatedCW,
              TopTitleRotated / TopTitleNotRotated, BottomTitleRotated /
              BottomTitleNotRotated, !UseTitleDecorRotation /
              UseTitleDecorRotation, StippledTitle / !StippledTitle,
              StippledIconTitle / !StippledIconTitle, IndexedWindowName /
              ExactWindowName, IndexedIconName / ExactIconName, TitleFormat /
              IconTitleFormat / !Borders / Borders, !Handles / Handles,
              WindowListSkip / WindowListHit, CirculateSkip / CirculateHit,
              CirculateSkipShaded / CirculateHitShaded, CirculateSkipIcon /
              CirculateHitIcon, Layer, StaysOnTop / StaysOnBottom / StaysPut,
              Sticky / Slippery, StickyAcrossPages / !StickyAcrossPages,
              StickyAcrossDesks / !StickyAcrossDesks, !StickyStippledTitle /
              StickyStippledTitle, !StickyStippledIconTitle /
              StickyStippledIconTitle, StartIconic / StartNormal, Color,
              ForeColor, BackColor, Colorset, HilightFore, HilightBack,
              HilightColorset, BorderColorset, HilightBorderColorset,
              IconTitleColorset, HilightIconTitleColorset,
              IconBackgroundColorset, IconTitleRelief, IconBackgroundRelief,
              IconBackgroundPadding, Font, IconFont, StartsOnDesk /
              StartsOnPage / StartsAnyWhere, StartsOnScreen, StartShaded /
              !StartShaded, ManualPlacementHonorsStartsOnPage /
              ManualPlacementIgnoresStartsOnPage, CaptureHonorsStartsOnPage /
              CaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage, RecaptureHonorsStartsOnPage /
              RecaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage, StartsOnPageIncludesTransients /
              StartsOnPageIgnoresTransients, IconTitle / !IconTitle,
              MwmButtons / FvwmButtons, MwmBorder / FvwmBorder, MwmDecor /
              !MwmDecor, MwmFunctions / !MwmFunctions, HintOverride /
              !HintOverride, !Button / Button, ResizeHintOverride /
              !ResizeHintOverride, OLDecor / !OLDecor, GNOMEUseHints /
              GNOMEIgnoreHints, StickyIcon / SlipperyIcon,
              StickyAcrossPagesIcon / !StickyAcrossPagesIcon,
              StickyAcrossDesksIcon / !StickyAcrossDesksIcon, ManualPlacement
              / CascadePlacement / MinOverlapPlacement /
              MinOverlapPercentPlacement / TileManualPlacement /
              TileCascadePlacement / PositionPlacement,
              MinOverlapPlacementPenalties,
              MinOverlapPercentPlacementPenalties, DecorateTransient /
              NakedTransient, DontRaiseTransient / RaiseTransient,
              DontLowerTransient / LowerTransient, DontStackTransientParent /
              StackTransientParent, SkipMapping / ShowMapping,
              ScatterWindowGroups / KeepWindowGroupsOnDesk, UseDecor,
              UseStyle, !UsePPosition / NoPPosition / UsePPosition,
              !UseUSPosition, NoUSPosition / UseUSPosition,
              !UseTransientPPosition, NoTransientPPosition /
              UseTransientPPosition, !UseTransientUSPosition /
              NoTransientUSPosition / UseTransientUSPosition, !UseIconPosition
              / NoIconPosition / UseIconPosition, Lenience / !Lenience,
              ClickToFocus / SloppyFocus / MouseFocus|FocusFollowsMouse /
              NeverFocus, ClickToFocusPassesClickOff /
              ClickToFocusPassesClick, ClickToFocusRaisesOff /
              ClickToFocusRaises, MouseFocusClickRaises /
              MouseFocusClickRaisesOff, GrabFocus / GrabFocusOff,
              GrabFocusTransientOff / GrabFocusTransient, FPFocusClickButtons,
              FPFocusClickModifiers, !FPSortWindowlistByFocus /
              FPSortWindowlistByFocus, FPClickRaisesFocused /
              !FPClickRaisesFocused, FPClickDecorRaisesFocused /
              !FPClickDecorRaisesFocused, FPClickIconRaisesFocused /
              !FPClickIconRaisesFocused, !FPClickRaisesUnfocused /
              FPClickRaisesUnfocused, FPClickDecorRaisesUnfocused /
              !FPClickDecorRaisesUnfocused, FPClickIconRaisesUnfocused /
              !FPClickIconRaisesUnfocused, FPClickToFocus / !FPClickToFocus,
              FPClickDecorToFocus / !FPClickDecorToFocus, FPClickIconToFocus /
              !FPClickIconToFocus, !FPEnterToFocus / FPEnterToFocus,
              !FPLeaveToUnfocus / FPLeaveToUnfocus, !FPFocusByProgram /
              FPFocusByProgram, !FPFocusByFunction / FPFocusByFunction,
              FPFocusByFunctionWarpPointer / !FPFocusByFunctionWarpPointer,
              FPLenient / !FPLenient, !FPPassFocusClick / FPPassFocusClick,
              !FPPassRaiseClick / FPPassRaiseClick, FPIgnoreFocusClickMotion /
              !FPIgnoreFocusClickMotion, FPIgnoreRaiseClickMotion /
              !FPIgnoreRaiseClickMotion, !FPAllowFocusClickFunction /
              FPAllowFocusClickFunction, !FPAllowRaiseClickFunction /
              FPAllowRaiseClickFunction, FPGrabFocus / !FPGrabFocus,
              !FPGrabFocusTransient / FPGrabFocusTransient,
              FPOverrideGrabFocus / !FPOverrideGrabFocus, FPReleaseFocus /
              !FPReleaseFocus, !FPReleaseFocusTransient /
              FPReleaseFocusTransient, FPOverrideReleaseFocus /
              !FPOverrideReleaseFocus, StartsLowered / StartsRaised,
              IgnoreRestack / AllowRestack, FixedPosition / VariablePosition,
              FixedUSPosition / VariableUSPosition, FixedPPosition /
              VariablePPosition, FixedSize / VariableSize, FixedUSSize /
              VariableUSSize, FixedPSize / VariablePSize, !Closable /
              Closable, !Iconifiable / Iconifiable, !Maximizable /
              Maximizable, !AllowMaximizeFixedSize / AllowMaximizeFixedSize,
              IconOverride / NoIconOverride / NoActiveIconOverride,
              DepressableBorder / FirmBorder, MinWindowSize, MaxWindowSize,
              IconifyWindowGroups / IconifyWindowGroupsOff, ResizeOpaque /
              ResizeOutline, BackingStore / BackingStoreOff /
              BackingStoreWindowDefault, Opacity / ParentalRelativity,
              SaveUnder / SaveUnderOff, WindowShadeShrinks /
              WindowShadeScrolls, WindowShadeSteps, WindowShadeAlwaysLazy /
              WindowShadeBusy / WindowShadeLazy, EWMHDonateIcon /
              EWMHDontDonateIcon, EWMHDonateMiniIcon / EWMHDontDonateMiniIcon,
              EWMHMiniIconOverride / EWMHNoMiniIconOverride,
              EWMHUseStackingOrderHints / EWMHIgnoreStackingOrderHints,
              EWMHIgnoreStateHints / EWMHUseStateHints, EWMHIgnoreStrutHints /
              EWMHUseStrutHints, EWMHIgnoreWindowType / !EWMHIgnoreWindowType,
              EWMHMaximizeIgnoreWorkingArea / EWMHMaximizeUseWorkingArea /
              EWMHMaximizeUseDynamicWorkingArea,
              EWMHPlacementIgnoreWorkingArea / EWMHPlacementUseWorkingArea /
              EWMHPlacementUseDynamicWorkingArea, MoveByProgramMethod,
              Unmanaged, State, SnapGrid, SnapAttraction, EdgeMoveDelay,
              EdgeResizeDelay.  EdgeMoveResistance, InitialMapCommand

              In the above list some options are listed as
              style-option/opposite-style-option.  The opposite-style-option
              for entries that have them describes the fvwm default behavior
              and can be used if you want to change the fvwm default behavior.

              Focus policy
                     ClickToFocus instructs fvwm to give the focus to a window
                     when it is clicked in.  The default MouseFocus (or its
                     alias FocusFollowsMouse) tells fvwm to give a window the
                     focus as soon as the pointer enters the window, and take
                     it away when the pointer leaves the window.  SloppyFocus
                     is similar, but doesn't give up the focus if the pointer
                     leaves the window to pass over the root window or a
                     ClickToFocus window (unless you click on it, that is),
                     which makes it possible to move the mouse out of the way
                     without losing focus.  A window with the style NeverFocus
                     never receives the focus.  This is useful for modules
                     like FvwmButtons.  for example.  Note: Once any of the
                     "FP..." styles has been used, the defaults that come with
                     the basic focus policies are not restored when the latter
                     are used again.  For example, once !FPGrabFocus has been
                     used, using ClickToFocus does not restore FPGrabFocus.

                     The focus model can be augmented with several additional
                     options.  In fvwm-2.5.3 and later, there are a large
                     number of advanced options beginning with "FP" or "!FP".
                     These options shall replace the older options one day and
                     are described first.  Using any of these new options may
                     limit compatibility with older releases.  In general,
                     options beginning with "FP" turn a feature on, while
                     those beginning with "!FP" turn it off.

              Focusing the window
                     With FPEnterToFocus, when the pointer enters a window it
                     receives focus.

                     With FPLeaveToUnfocus a window loses focus when the
                     pointer leaves it.

                     With FPClickToFocus, FPClickDecorToFocus or
                     FPClickIconToFocus, a window receives focus when the
                     inside of the window or the decorations or its icon is
                     clicked.

                     The FPFocusByProgram style allows windows to take the
                     focus themselves.

                     The !FPFocusByFunction style forbids that a window
                     receives the focus via the Focus and FlipFocus commands.

                     The FPFocusByFunctionWarpPointer style controls if the
                     pointer is warped to a selected window when the Focus
                     command is used.

                     FPLenient allows focus on windows that do not want it,
                     like FvwmPager or xclock.

                     The FPFocusClickButtons style takes a list of mouse
                     buttons that can be clicked to focus or raise a window
                     when the appropriate style is used.  The default is to
                     use the first three buttons ("123").

                     The FPFocusClickModifiers style takes a list of modifier
                     keys just like the Key command.  The exact combination of
                     modifier keys must be pressed for the click to focus or
                     raise a window to work.  The default is to use no
                     modifiers ("N").

                     With the FPPassFocusClick style, the click that was used
                     to focus a window is passed to the application.

                     With the FPAllowFocusClickFunction style, the click that
                     was used to focus a window can also trigger a normal
                     action that was bound to the window with the Mouse
                     command).

                     If the FPIgnoreFocusClickMotion style is used, clicking
                     in a window and then dragging the pointer with the button
                     held down does not count as the click to focus the
                     window.  Instead, the application processes these events
                     normally.  This is useful to select text in a terminal
                     window with the mouse without raising the window.
                     However, mouse bindings on the client window are not
                     guaranteed to work anymore (see Mouse command).  This
                     style forces the initial click to be passed to the
                     application.  The distance that the pointer must be moved
                     to trigger this is controlled by the MoveThreshold
                     command.

                     The FPSortWindowlistByFocus and !FPSortWindowlistByFocus
                     styles control whether the internal window list is sorted
                     in the order the windows were focused or in the order
                     they were created.  The latter is the default for
                     ClickToFocus and SloppyFocus.

                     Clicking the window to raise

                     The styles FPClickRaisesFocused,
                     FPClickDecorRaisesFocused and FPClickIconRaisesFocused
                     allow one to raise the window when the interior or the
                     decorations or the icon of the window is clicked while
                     the window is already focused.

                     The styles FPClickRaisesUnfocused,
                     FPClickDecorRaisesUnfocused and
                     FPClickIconRaisesUnfocused allow one to raise the window
                     when the interior or the decorations or the icon of the
                     window is clicked while the window is not yet focused.

                     With the FPPassRaiseClick style, the click that was used
                     to raise the window is passed to the application.

                     With the FPAllowRaiseClickFunction style, the click that
                     was used to raise the window can also trigger a normal
                     action that was bound to the window with the Mouse
                     command.

                     If the FPIgnoreRaiseClickMotion style is used, clicking
                     in a window and then dragging the pointer with the button
                     held down does not count as the click to raise the
                     window.  Instead, the application processes these events
                     normally.  This is useful to select text in a terminal
                     window with the mouse without raising the window.
                     However, mouse bindings on the client window are not
                     guaranteed to work anymore (see Mouse command.  Note that
                     this style forces that the initial click is passed to the
                     application.  The distance that the pointer must be moved
                     to trigger this is controlled by the MoveThreshold
                     command.

                     Grabbing the focus when a new window is created

                     New normal or transient windows with the FPGrabFocus or
                     FPGrabFocusTransient style automatically receive the
                     focus when they are created.  FPGrabFocus is the default
                     for windows with the ClickToFocus style.  Note that even
                     if these styles are disabled, the application may take
                     the focus itself.  Fvwm can not prevent this.

                     The OverrideGrabFocus style instructs fvwm to never take
                     away the focus from such a window via the GrabFocus or
                     GrabFocusTransient styles.  This can be useful if you
                     like to have transient windows receive the focus
                     immediately, for example in a web browser, but not while
                     you are working in a terminal window or a text processor.

                     The above three styles are accompanied by FPReleaseFocus,
                     FPReleaseFocusTransient and FPOverrideReleaseFocus.
                     These control if the focus is returned to another window
                     when the window is closed.  Otherwise no window or the
                     window under the pointer receives the focus.

                     ClickToFocusPassesClickOff and ClickToFocusPassesClick
                     controls whether a mouse click to focus a window is sent
                     to the application or not.  Similarly,
                     ClickToFocusRaisesOff/MouseFocusClickRaisesOff and
                     ClickToFocusRaises/MouseFocusClickRaises control if the
                     window is raised (but depending on the focus model).

                     Note: in fvwm versions prior to 2.5.3, the "Click..."
                     options applied only to windows with ClickToFocus while
                     the "Mouse..." options applied to windows with a
                     different focus policy.  This is no longer the case.

                     The old GrabFocus style is equivalent to using
                     FPGrabFocus + FPReleaseFocus.

                     The old GrabFocusTransient style is equivalent to using
                     FPGrabFocusTransient + FPReleaseFocusTransient.

                     Lenience is equivalent to the new style FPLenient.

              Window title
                     The Title and !Title options determine if the window has
                     a title-bar or not.  By default all windows have a
                     title-bar.  NoTitle is equivalent to !Title but is
                     deprecated.

                     Windows with the TitleAtBottom, TitleAtLeft or
                     TitleAtRight style have a title-bar below, to the left or
                     to the right of the window instead of above as usual.
                     The TitleAtTop style restores the default placement.
                     Even if the window has the !Title style set, this affects
                     the WindowShade command.  Please check the WindowShade
                     command for interactions between that command and these
                     styles.  Titles on the left or right side of the windows
                     are augmented by the following styles:

                     Normally, the text in titles on the left side of a window
                     is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the normal
                     upright position and 90 degrees clockwise for titles on
                     the right side.  It can also be rotated in the opposite
                     directions with LeftTitleRotatedCW if TitleAtLeft is
                     used, and with RightTitleRotatedCCW if TitleAtRight is
                     used.  The defaults can be restored with
                     LeftTitleRotatedCCW and RightTitleRotatedCW.  A normal
                     horizontal text may be rotated as well with
                     TopTitleRotated if TitleAtTop is used, and with
                     BottomTitleRotated if TitleAtBottom is used.  The
                     defaults can be restored with TopTitleNotRotated and
                     BottomTitleNotRotated.

                     By default the title bar decoration defined using the
                     TitleStyle command is rotated following the title text
                     rotation (see the previous paragraph).  This can be
                     disabled by using the !UseTitleDecorRotation style.
                     UseTitleDecorRotation reverts back to the default.

                     With the StippledTitle style, titles are drawn with the
                     same effect that is usually reserved for windows with the
                     Sticky, StickyAcrossPages or StickyAcrossDesks style.
                     !StippledTitle reverts back to normal titles.
                     StippledTitleOff is equivalent to !StippledTitle but is
                     deprecated.

                     Color takes two arguments.  The first is the window-label
                     text color and the second is the window decorations
                     normal background color.  The two colors are separated
                     with a slash.  If the use of a slash causes problems then
                     the separate ForeColor and BackColor options can be used.

                     Colorset takes the colorset number as its sole argument
                     and overrides the colors set by Color.  Instead, the
                     corresponding colors from the given colorset are used.
                     Note that all other features of a colorset are not used.
                     Use the Colorset decoration style in the TitleStyle and
                     ButtonStyle command for that.  To stop using the
                     colorset, the colorset number is omitted.

                     The HilightFore, HilightBack and HilightColorset style
                     options work exactly like ForeColor, BackColor and
                     Colorset but are used only if the window has the focus.
                     These styles replace the old commands HilightColor and
                     HilightColorset.

                     BorderColorset takes the colorset number as its sole
                     argument and overrides the colors set by Color or
                     Colorset.  for the window border.  To stop using a
                     colorset, the argument is omitted.

                     The HilightBorderColorset style option works similarly to
                     BorderColorset but is used when the window has the focus.

                     !IconTitle disables displaying icon labels while the
                     opposite style IconTitle enables icon labels (default
                     behaviour).  NoIconTitle is equivalent to !IconTitle but
                     is deprecated.

                     IconTitleColorset takes the colorset number as its sole
                     argument and overrides the colors set by Color or
                     Colorset.  To stop using this colorset, the argument is
                     omitted.

                     HilightIconTitleColorset takes the colorset number as its
                     sole argument and overrides the colors set by
                     HilightColor or HilightColorset.  To stop using this
                     colorset, the argument is omitted.

                     IconBackgroundColorset takes the colorset number as its
                     sole argument and uses it to set a background for the
                     icon picture.  By default the icon picture is not drawn
                     onto a background image.  To restore the default, the
                     argument is omitted.

                     IconTitleRelief takes one numeric argument that may be
                     between -50 and +50 pixels and defines the thickness of
                     the 3D relief drawn around the icon title.  With negative
                     values the icon title gets a pressed in look.  The
                     default is 2 and it is restored if the argument is
                     omitted.

                     IconBackgroundRelief takes one numeric argument that may
                     be between -50 and +50 pixels and defines the thickness
                     of the 3D relief drawn around the icon picture background
                     (if any).  With negative values the icon background gets
                     a pressed in look.  The default is 2 and it is restored
                     if the argument is omitted.

                     IconBackgroundPadding takes one numeric argument that may
                     be between 0 and 50 pixels and defines the amount of free
                     space between the relief of the icon background picture
                     (if any) and the icon picture.  The default is 2 and it
                     is restored if the argument is omitted.

                     The Font and IconFont options take the name of a font as
                     their sole argument.  This font is used in the window or
                     icon title.  By default the font given in the DefaultFont
                     command is used.  To revert back to the default, use the
                     style without the name argument.  These styles replace
                     the older WindowFont and IconFont commands.

                     The deprecated IndexedWindowName style causes fvwm to use
                     window titles in the form

                         name (i)

                     where name is the exact window name and i is an integer
                     which represents the i th window with name as window
                     name.  This has been replaced with:

                         TitleFormat %n (%t)

                     ExactWindowName restores the default which is to use the
                     exact window name.  Deprecated in favour of:

                             TitleFormat %n

                     IndexedIconName and ExactIconName work the same as
                     IndexedWindowName and ExactWindowName styles but for the
                     icon titles.  Both are deprecated in favour of:

                         IconTitleFormat %n (%t)
                         IconTitleFormat %n

                     TitleFormat describes what the visible name of a window
                     should look like, with the following placeholders being
                     valid:

                     %n
                         Insert the window's name.

                     %i
                         Insert the window's icon name.

                     %c
                         Insert the window's class name.

                     %r
                         Insert the window's resource name.

                     %t
                         Insert the window count.

                     %I
                         Insert the window ID.

                     %%
                         Insert a literal '%' character.

                     Any amount of whitespace may be used, along with other
                     characters to make up the string -- but a valid
                     TitleFormat string must contain at least one of the
                     placeholders mentioned.  No quote stripping is performed
                     on the string, so for example the following is printed
                     verbatim:

                             TitleFormat " %n " -> [%t] ->      [%c]

                     Note: It's perfectly possible to use a TitleFormat which
                     can result in wiping out the visible title altogether.
                     For example:

                             TitleFormat %z

                     Simply because the placeholder '%z' isn't supported.
                     This is not a bug but rather a facet of how the
                     formatting parser works.

                     IconTitleFormat describes what the visible icon name of a
                     window should look like, with the options being the same
                     as TitleFormat.

              Title buttons
                     Button and !Button take a numeric argument which is the
                     number of the title-bar button which is to be shown or
                     omitted.  NoButton is equivalent to !Button but is
                     deprecated.

                     MwmButtons makes the Maximize button look pressed-in when
                     the window is maximized.  See the MwmDecorMax flag in
                     ButtonStyle for more information.  To switch this style
                     off again, use the FvwmButtons style.

              Borders
                     !Borders suppresses the window border (but not the title)
                     completely.  The Borders style enables them again.
                     Without borders, all other styles affecting window
                     borders are meaningless.

                     MwmBorder makes the 3D bevel more closely match Mwm's.
                     FvwmBorder turns off the previous option.

                     With the !Handles style, the window does not get the
                     handles in the window corners that are commonly used to
                     resize it.  With !Handles, the width from the BorderWidth
                     style is used.  By default, or if Handles is specified,
                     the width from the HandleWidth style is used.  NoHandles
                     is equivalent to !Handles but is deprecated.

                     HandleWidth takes a numeric argument which is the width
                     of the border to place the window if it does have
                     resize-handles.  Using HandleWidth without an argument
                     restores the default.

                     BorderWidth takes a numeric argument which is the width
                     of the border to place the window if it does not have
                     resize-handles.  It is used only if the !Handles style is
                     specified too.  Using BorderWidth without an argument
                     restores the default.

                     DepressableBorder makes the border parts of the window
                     decoration look sunken in when a button is pressed over
                     them.  This can be disabled again with the FirmBorder
                     style.

              Icons, shading, maximizing, movement, resizing
                     Icon takes an (optional) unquoted string argument which
                     is the icon bitmap or pixmap to use.  Icons specified
                     this way override pixmap icons, but not icon windows or
                     the ewmh icon, provided by the client in the application
                     (with the WM_HINTS property or with the ewmh _NET_WM_ICON
                     property).  The IconOverride style changes the behavior
                     to override any client-provided icons; the NoIconOverride
                     style changes the behavior to not override any
                     client-provided icons; the default overriding behavior
                     can be activated with the NoActiveIconOverride style.
                     With this style, fvwm uses application provided icons if
                     the icon is changed but uses the icon provided in the
                     configuration file until then.

                     There is one exception to these rules, namely

                         Style * Icon unknown.xpm

                     doesn't force the unknown.xpm icon on every window, it
                     just sets the default icon like the DefaultIcon command.
                     If you really want all windows to have the same icon, you
                     can use

                         Style ** Icon unknown.xpm

                     If the NoIcon attribute is set then the specified window
                     simply disappears when it is iconified.  The window can
                     be recovered through the window-list.  If Icon is set
                     without an argument then the NoIcon attribute is cleared
                     but no icon is specified.  An example which allows only
                     the FvwmPager module icon to exist:

                         Style * NoIcon
                         Style FvwmPager Icon

                     IconBox takes no argument, four numeric arguments (plus
                     optionally a screen specification), an X11 geometry
                     string or the string "none":

                         IconBox [screen scr-spec] l t r b

                     or

                         IconBox geometry

                     Where l is the left coordinate, t is the top, r is right
                     and b is bottom.  Negative coordinates indicate distance
                     from the right or bottom of the screen.  If the first
                     argument is the word screen, the scr-spec argument
                     specifies the Xinerama screen on which the IconBox is
                     defined.  It can be the usual screen Xinerama
                     specification, 'p', ´c', 'g', a screen number or the
                     additional 'w' for the screen where the window center is
                     located.  This is only useful with multiple Xinerama
                     screens.  The "l t r b" specification is more flexible
                     than an X11 geometry.  For example:

                         IconBox -80 240 -1 -1

                     defines a box that is 80 pixels wide from the right edge,
                     240 pixels down from the top, and continues to the bottom
                     of the screen.

                     Perhaps it is easier to use is an X11 geometry string
                     though:

                         IconBox 1000x70-1-1

                     places an 1000 by 70 pixel icon box on the bottom of the
                     screen starting in the lower right hand corner of the
                     screen.  One way to figure out a geometry like this is to
                     use a window that resizes in pixel increments, for
                     example, xv.  Then resize and place the xv window where
                     you want the iconbox.  Then use FvwmIdent to read the
                     windows geometry.  The icon box is a region of the screen
                     where fvwm attempts to put icons for any matching window,
                     as long as they do not overlap other icons.  Multiple
                     icon boxes can be defined as overflow areas.  When the
                     first icon box is full, the second one is filled.  All
                     the icon boxes for one style must be defined in one Style
                     command.  For example:

                         Style * IconBox -80 240 -1 -1, \
                                 IconBox 1000x70-1-1

                     A Style command with the IconBox option replaces any icon
                     box defined previously by another Style command for the
                     same style.  That's why the backslash in the previous
                     example is required.

                     Note: The geometry for the icon box command takes the
                     additional screen specifier "@w" in case a Xinerama setup
                     is used.  This designates the screen where the window
                     center is located.  The additional screen specifier is
                     not allowed anywhere else.

                     If you never define an icon box, or you fill all the icon
                     boxes, fvwm has a default icon box that covers the
                     screen, it fills top to bottom, then left to right, and
                     has an 80x80 pixel grid.  To disable all but the default
                     icon box you can use IconBox without arguments in a
                     separate Style command.  To disable all icon boxes
                     including the default icon box, the argument "none" can
                     be specified.

                     Hint: You can auto arrange your icons in the icon box
                     with a simple fvwm function.  Put the
                     "DeiconifyAndRearrange" function below in your
                     configuration file:

                         AddToFunc DeiconifyAndRearrange
                          + C Iconify off
                          + C All (CurrentPage, Iconic) PlaceAgain Icon

                     And then replace all places where you call the Iconify
                     command to de-iconify an icon with a call to the new
                     function.  For example replace

                         AddToFunc IconFunc
                          + C Iconify off
                          + M Raise
                          + M Move
                          + D Iconify off

                         Mouse 1 I A Iconify off

                     with

                         AddToFunc IconFunc
                          + C DeiconifyAndRearrange
                          + M Raise
                          + M Move
                          + D DeiconifyAndRearrange

                         Mouse 1 I A DeiconifyAndRearrange

                     IconGrid takes 2 numeric arguments greater than zero.

                         IconGrid x y

                     Icons are placed in an icon box by stepping through the
                     icon box using the x and y values for the icon grid,
                     looking for a free space.  The default grid is 3 by 3
                     pixels which gives a tightly packed appearance.  To get a
                     more regular appearance use a grid larger than your
                     largest icon.  Use the IconSize argument to clip or
                     stretch an icon to a maximum size.  An IconGrid
                     definition must follow the IconBox definition that it
                     applies to:

                         Style * IconBox -80x240-1-1, IconGrid 90 90

                     IconFill takes 2 arguments.

                         IconFill Bottom Right

                     Icons are placed in an icon box by stepping through the
                     icon box using these arguments to control the direction
                     the box is filled in.  By default the direction is left
                     to right, then top to bottom.  This would be expressed
                     as:

                         IconFill left top

                     To fill an icon box in columns instead of rows, specify
                     the vertical direction (top or bottom) first.  The
                     directions can be abbreviated or spelled out as follows:
                     "t", "top", "b", "bot", "bottom", "l", "lft", "left",
                     "r", "rgt", "right".  An IconFill definition must follow
                     the IconBox definition that it applies to:

                         Style * IconBox -80x240-1-1, IconFill b r

                     IconSize sets limits on the size of an icon image.  Both
                     user-provided and application-provided icon images are
                     affected.

                         IconSize [ width height [ maxwidth maxheight ] ]

                     All arguments are measured in pixels.  When all four
                     arguments are passed to IconSize, width and height
                     represent the minimum size of an icon, and maxwidth and
                     maxheight represent the maximum size of an icon.  Icon
                     images that are smaller than the minimum size are padded.
                     Icon images that are bigger than the maximum size are
                     clipped.

                     If only two arguments are passed to IconSize, width and
                     height represent the absolute size of an icon.  Icons
                     covered by this style are padded or clipped to achieve
                     the given size.

                     If no arguments are specified, the default values are
                     used for each dimension.  This effectively places no
                     limits on the size of an icon.

                     The value of "-1" can be used in place of any of the
                     arguments to specify the default value for that
                     dimension.

                     In addition to the numeric arguments, 1 additional
                     argument can be "Stretched", "Adjusted", or "Shrunk".

                     Note that module provided icon managers are not affected
                     by this style.

              MiniIcon specifies a pixmap to use as the miniature icon for the
              window.  This miniature icon can be drawn in a title-bar button
              (see ButtonStyle), and can be used by various fvwm modules
              (FvwmIconMan and FvwmPager).  It takes the name of a pixmap as
              an argument.

              WindowShadeShrinks and WindowShadeScrolls control if the
              contents of a window that is being shaded with the WindowShade
              command are scrolled (default) or if they stay in place.  The
              shrinking mode is a bit faster

              The WindowShadeSteps option selects the number of steps for
              animation when shading a window with WindowShade.  It takes one
              number as its argument.  If the number has a trailing 'p' it
              sets the number of pixels to use as the step size instead of a
              fixed number of steps.  0 disables the animation.  This happens
              too if the argument is omitted or invalid.

              The WindowShade command has two modes of operation: busy and
              lazy shading.  Busy shading can be 50% slower than lazy shading,
              but the latter can look strange under some conditions, for
              example, if the window borders, buttons or the title are filled
              with a tiled pixmap.  Also, the window handles are not drawn in
              lazy mode and the border relief may only be drawn partially
              right before the window reaches the shaded state or tight after
              leaves the unshaded state.  By default, fvwm uses lazy mode if
              there are no bad visual effects (not counting the window
              handles) and busy mode otherwise.  Use the WindowShadeAlwaysLazy
              or WindowShadeBusy to force using the lazy or busy mode.  The
              default setting is restored with WindowShadeLazy.

              ResizeOpaque instructs fvwm to resize the corresponding windows
              with their contents visible instead of using an outline.  Since
              this causes the application to redraw frequently it can be quite
              slow and make the window flicker excessively, depending on the
              amount of graphics the application redraws.  The ResizeOutline
              style (default) negates the ResizeOpaque style.  Many
              applications do not like their windows being resized opaque,
              e.g. XEmacs, Netscape or terminals with a pixmap background.  If
              you do not like the result, do not use the ResizeOpaque style
              for these windows.  To exempt certain windows from opaque
              resizing you could use these lines in your configuration file:

                  Style * ResizeOpaque
                  Style rxvt ResizeOutline
                  Style emacs ResizeOutline

              Sticky makes the window sticky, i.e. it is always visible on
              each page and each desk.  The opposite style, Slippery reverts
              back to the default.

              StickyIcon makes the window sticky when it's iconified.  It
              de-iconifies on top the active desktop.  SlipperyIcon reverts
              back to the default.

              StickyAcrossPages and StickyAcrossPagesIcon work like Sticky and
              StickyIcon, but stick the window only across pages, not desks
              while StickyAcrossDesks and StickyAcrossDesksIcon works the
              other way round.

              Windows that have been marked as Sticky or StickyAcrossDesks or
              StickyAcrossPages will have stipples drawn on the titlebar.
              This can be negated with the !StickyStippledTitle style.  The
              style StickyStippledTitle puts back the stipples where that
              window has also been marked as Sticky.  Note that this is the
              default style for Sticky windows.  Sticky icons will have
              stipples drawn on the icon title.  This can be disabled in the
              same way with the !StickyStippledIconTitle style.

              Windows with the StartIconic style are shown as icons initially.
              Note that some applications counteract that by deiconifying
              themselves.  The default is to not iconify windows and can be
              set with the StartNormal style.

              StickyIcon makes the window sticky when it's iconified.  It
              de-iconifies on top the active desktop.  SlipperyIcon reverts
              back to the default.

              StickyIconPage works like StickyIcon, but sticks the icon only
              across pages, not desks while StickyIconDesk works the other way
              round.

              StippledIconTitle works like StippledTitle in that it draws
              stipples on the titles of icons but doesn't make the icon
              sticky.

              IgnoreRestack makes fvwm ignore attempts of clients to raise or
              lower their own windows.  By default, the opposite style,
              AllowRestack is active.

              FixedPosition and FixedUSPosition make fvwm ignore attempts of
              the user to move the window.  It is still possible to move the
              window by resizing it.  To allow the user to move windows, use
              the VariablePosition or VariableUSPosition style.

              FixedSize and FixedUSSize make fvwm ignore attempts of the user
              to resize the window.  To allow the user to resize windows, use
              the VariableSize or VariableUSSize style.

              FixedPPosition and FixedPSize make fvwm ignore attempts of the
              program to move or resize its windows.  To allow this kind of
              actions, use the VariablePPosition or VariablePSize style.
              These styles may sometimes affect the initial placement and
              dimensions of new windows (depending on the application).  If
              windows are created at strange places, try either the
              VariablePPosition or !UsePPosition styles.  The FixedPSize style
              may screw up window dimensions for some applications.  Do Not
              use this style in this case.

              MoveByProgramMethod affects how fvwm reacts to requests by the
              application to move its windows.  By default, fvwm tries to
              detect which method to use, but it sometimes detects the wrong
              method.  You may come across a window that travels across the
              screen by a few pixels when the application resizes it, moves to
              a screen border with the frame decorations off screen, that
              remembers its position for the next time it starts but appears
              in a slighly shifted position, or that attepmts to become full
              screen but has the.  Try out both options, UseGravity and
              IgnoreGravity on the window (and that window only) and see if
              that helps.  By default, fvwm uses the AutoDetect method.  Once
              the method was detected, it is never changed again.  As long as
              fvwm can not detect the proper method, it uses IgnoreGravity.
              To force fvwm to retry the detection, use one of the other two
              options first and then use AutoDetect again.

              Note: This option was introduced to alleviate a problem with the
              ICCCM specification.  The ICCCM clearly states that the
              UseGravity option should be used, but traditionally applications
              ignored this rule.

              Closable enables the functions Close, Delete and Destroy to be
              performed on the windows.  This is on by default.  The opposite,
              !Closable, inhibits the window to be closed.

              Iconifiable enables the function Iconify to be performed on the
              windows.  This is on by default.  The opposite, !Iconifiable,
              inhibits the window from being iconified.

              Maximizable enables the function Maximize to be performed on the
              windows.  This is on by default.  The opposite, !Maximizable,
              inhibits the window from being maximized.

              AllowMaximizeFixedSize enables the function Maximize to be
              performed on windows that are not resizable, unless maximization
              has been disabled either using the style !Maximizable or through
              WM hints.  This is on by default.  The opposite,
              !AllowMaximizeFixedSize, inhibits all windows that are not
              resizable from being maximized.

              ResizeHintOverride instructs fvwm to ignore the program supplied
              minimum and maximum size as well as the resize step size (the
              character size in many applications).  This can be handy for
              broken applications that refuse to be resized.  Do not use it if
              you do not need it.  The default (opposite) style is
              NoResizeOverride.

              MinWindowSize [ width [ p ] height [ p ] ] Tells fvwm the
              minimum width and height of a window.  The values are the
              percentage of the total screen area.  If the letter 'p' is
              appended to either of the values, the numbers are interpreted as
              pixels.  This command is useful for certain versions of xemacs
              which freak out if their windows become too small.  If you omit
              he parameters or their values are invalid, both limits are set
              to 0 pixels (which is the default value).

              MaxWindowSize [ width [ p ] height [ p ] ] Tells fvwm the
              maximum width and height of a window.  The values are the
              percentage of the total screen area.  If the letter 'p' is
              appended to either of the values, the numbers are interpreted as
              pixels.  This command is useful to force large application
              windows to be fully visible.  Neither height nor width may be
              less than 100 pixels.  If you omit the parameters or their
              values are invalid, both limits are set to 32767 pixels (which
              is the default).

              With IconifyWindowGroups all windows in the same window group
              are iconified and deiconified at once when any window in the
              group is (de)iconified.  The default is IconifyWindowGroupsOff,
              which disables this behavior.  Although a number of applications
              use the window group hint, it is rarely used in a proper way, so
              it is probably best to use IconifyWindowGroups only for selected
              applications.

              The option SnapAttraction affects interactive window movement:
              If during an interactive move the window or icon comes within
              proximity pixels of another the window or icon, it is moved to
              make the borders adjoin.  The default of 0 means that no
              snapping happens.  Calling this command without arguments turns
              off snap attraction and restores the default behavior.  Please
              refer also to the SnapGrid command.

              The second argument determined is optional and may be set to one
              of the five following values: With All both icons and windows
              snap to other windows and other icons.  SameType lets windows
              snap only to windows, and icons snap only to icons.  With
              Windows windows snap only to other windows.  Similarly with
              Icons icons snap only to other icons.  With None no snapping
              takes place.  This option can be useful in conjunction with the
              following argument if you only want to snap against the screen
              edges.  The default behavior is All.

              The third and last optional argument may be set to one of the
              four following values:

              ·   With Screen the already snapping icons or windows, which is
                  controlled by the second argument, will snap now also to the
                  screen edges.

              ·   ScreenWindows snaps only windows to the screen edges.

              ·   ScreenIcons snaps only icons to the screen edges.

              ·   ScreenAll snaps windows and icons to the screen edges.

              The option SnapGrid defines an invisible grid on the screen.
              During an interactive move a window or icon is positioned such
              that its location (top left corner) is coincident with the
              nearest grid point.  The default x-grid-size and y-grid-size
              setting are both 1, which is effectively no grid all.

              An interactive move with both SnapGrid and SnapAttraction
              results in the window being moved to be adjacent to the nearest
              window border (if within snap proximity) or grid position.  The
              window moves the shortest distance possible to satisfy both
              SnapGrid and SnapAttraction.  Note that the x and y coordinates
              are not coupled.  For example, a window may snap to another
              window on the x axis while snapping to a grid point on the y
              axis.  Using this style without arguments reinstates the default
              settings.

              The styles EdgeMoveDelay and EdgeResizeDelay tells how hard it
              should be to change the desktop viewport by moving or resizing a
              window over the edge of the screen.  The parameter tells how
              many milliseconds the pointer must spend on the screen edge
              before fvwm moves the viewport.  The command EdgeScroll
              determines how far the viewport is scrolled.  If -1 is given as
              the delay, page flipping is disabled completely.  The defaults
              are no delay for moving (0) and no flipping for resizing (-1).
              Using these styles without any argument restores the default
              settings.  Note that, with

                  EdgeScroll 0 0

              it is still possible to move or resize windows across the edge
              of the current screen.  See also EdgeThickness.

              The option EdgeMoveResistance makes it easier to place a window
              directly adjacent to the screen's or xinerama screen's border.
              It takes one or two parameters.  The first parameter tells how
              many pixels over the edge of the screen a window's edge must
              move before it actually moves partially off the screen.  The
              optional second parameter does the same as the first, but for
              individual Xinerama screens.  If omitted, the value of the first
              parameter is assumed for this type of movement.  Set the second
              parameter to 0 to zero to ignore individual xinerama screen
              edges.  Note that the center of the window being moved
              determines the xinerama screen on which the window should be
              kept.  Both values are 0 by default.  To restore the defaults,
              the option EdgeMoveResistance can be used without any
              parameters.

              The option InitialMapCommand allows for any valid fvwm command
              or function to run when the window is initially mapped by fvwm.
              Example:

                  Style MyWindow StartsOnPage 0 0, InitialMapCommand Iconify

              This would hence place the window called MyWindow on page 0 0
              for the current desk, and immediately run the Iconify command on
              that window.

              Note that should InitialMapCommand be used as a global option
              for all windows, but there is a need that some windows should
              not have this command applied, then an action of Nop can be used
              on those windows, as in the following example:

                  Style * InitialMapCommand Iconify
                  Style XTeddy InitialMapCommand Nop

       Window Manager placement
              Applications can place windows at a particular spot on the
              screen either by window manager hints or a geometry
              specification.  When they do neither, then the window manager
              steps in to find a place for the window.  Fvwm knows several
              ways to deal with this situation.  The default is
              TileCascadePlacement.

              PositionPlacement [Center|UnderMouse|move-arguments] When used
              without an argument, new windows are placed in the top left
              corner of the display.  With the argument Center, all new window
              appear at the center of the screen, and with UnderMouse, windows
              are centered under the mouse pointer where possible.  If the
              window is unable to fit on the screen because the pointer is at
              the edge of the screen, then the window is forced on-screen
              using this option.  If any other move-arguments are given, they
              are interpreted exactly as the Move command does (with the
              exception that references to the current window position do not
              work as the window has not been placed yet).

              CascadePlacement automatically place new windows in a cascading
              fashion.

              TileCascadePlacement automatically places new windows in a smart
              location - a location in which they do not overlap any other
              windows on the screen.  If no such position can be found
              CascadePlacement is used as a fall-back method.

              TileManualPlacement This is the same as TileCascadePlacement,
              but uses ManualPlacement as the fall-back method.

              MinOverlapPlacement automatically places new windows in a
              location in which the overlapping area in pixels of other
              windows is minimized.  By default this placement policy tries to
              avoid overlapping icons and windows on higher layers.  This can
              be configured with the MinOverlapPlacementPenalties style.

              MinOverlapPercentPlacement is similar to MinOverlapPlacement but
              tries to minimize the overlapped percentages of other windows
              instead of the overlapped area in pixels.  This placement policy
              tries to avoid covering other windows completely and tries even
              harder not to cover small windows.  This can be configured with
              the MinOverlapPlacementPenalties and
              MinOverlapPercentPlacementPenalties styles.

              MinOverlapPlacementPenalties takes at most 6 positive or null
              decimal arguments:

                  normal ontop icon sticky below strut

              if trailing arguments are missing the default is used which is:

                  1 5 10 1 0.05 50

              To reset this style to the default values, prefix it with a '!'.
              This style configures the MinOverlapPlacement and
              MinOverlapPercentPlacement placement policy.  The normal factor
              affects normal windows, the ontop factor affects windows with a
              greater layer than the window being placed, the icon factor
              affects icons, the sticky factor affects sticky windows, the
              below factor affects windows with a smaller layer than the
              window being placed, the strut factor affects the complement of
              the EWMH working area if the window being placed has the
              EWMHPlacementUseWorkingArea style and windows with an EWMH strut
              hint (i.e., a "please do not cover me" hint) if the window being
              placed has the EWMHPlacementUseDynamicWorkingArea style.  These
              factors represent the amount of area that these types of windows
              (or area) are counted as, when a new window is placed.  For
              example, by default the area of ontop windows is counted 5 times
              as much as normal windows.  So MinOverlapPlacement and
              MinOverlapPercentPlacement covers 5 times as much area of
              another window before it will cover an ontop window.  To treat
              ontop windows the same as other windows, set this to 1.  To
              really, really avoid putting windows under ontop windows, set
              this to a high value, say 1000.  This style affects the window
              already mapped and not the window which is currently placed.
              There is one exception to this rule: in the case of the window
              being placed has the EWMHPlacementUseWorkingArea style the strut
              factor affects the placed window.

              MinOverlapPercentPlacementPenalties takes at most 4 positive or
              null integer arguments:

                  cover_100 cover_95 cover_85 cover_75

              if trailing arguments are missing the defaults are used which
              are:

                  12 6 4 1

              To reset this style to the default values, prefix it with a '!'.
              This style affects the MinOverlapPercentPlacement placement
              policy and is similar to the MinOverlapPlacementPenalties style.
              The cover_xx factor is used when the window being placed covers
              at least xx percent of the window.  This factor is added to the
              factor determined by the MinOverlapPlacementPenalties style.

              ManualPlacement (aka active placement).  The user is required to
              place every new window manually.  The window only shows as a
              rubber band until a place is selected manually.  The window is
              placed when a mouse button or any key except Escape is pressed.
              Escape aborts manual placement which places the window in the
              top left corner of the screen.  If mouse button 2 is pressed
              during the initial placement of a window (respectively Shift and
              mouse button 1 in case Mwm emulation has been enabled with the
              Emulate command), the user is asked to resize the window too.

              It is possible to define buttons usable to place windows with
              the Move command and the special context 'P' for placement (see
              Move command).  However, you can't redefine the way to also
              resize the window other than the way it is affected by the
              Emulate command.  The button used for placing the window can be
              checked with the PlacedByButton condition (see Current command).

              Example:

                  Style * ManualPlacement

                  *FvwmEvent: PassID
                  *FvwmEvent: add_window GrowDownFunc
                  AddToFunc StartFunction
                  + I FvwmEvent

                  AddToFunc GrowDownFunc
                  + I windowid $0 (PlacedByButton 3) \
                    Resize bottomright keep -0p

              Now, whenever a window is created and the user presses button 3
              to finish initial placement, the window is automatically
              enlarged until it hits the bottom screen border.

              Old placement styles DumbPlacement / SmartPlacement /
              SmartPlacementOff, CleverPlacement / CleverPlacementOff,
              ActivePlacement / RandomPlacement,
              ActivePlacementsHonorsStartsOnPage /
              ActivePlacementsHonorsStartsOnPageOff, GlobalOpts
              SmartPlacementIsReallySmart / GlobalOpts SmartPlacementIsNormal
              are still supported but will be removed in the future.  The old
              and new styles can be translated according to the following
              table:

                  GlobalOpts SmartPlacementIsReallySmart
                  Style * SmartPlacement
                  -->
                  Style * SmartPlacement, CleverPlacement

                  GlobalOpts SmartPlacementIsNormal
                  Style * SmartPlacement
                    -->
                  Style * SmartPlacement, CleverPlacementOff

                  Style * DumbPlacement, RandomPlacement
                    -->
                  Style * CascadePlacement

                  Style * DumbPlacement, ActivePlacement
                    -->
                  Style * ManualPlacement

                  Style * SmartPlacement, \
                  RandomPlacement, CleverPlacementOff
                    -->
                  Style * TileCascadePlacement

                  Style * SmartPlacement, \
                  ActivePlacement, CleverPlacementOff
                    -->
                  Style * TileManualPlacement

                  Style * SmartPlacement, CleverPlacement
                    -->
                  Style * MinOverlapPlacement

                  Style * SmartPlacement, \
                  ActivePlacement, CleverPlacement
                    -->
                  Style * MinOverlapPercentPlacement

                  Style * ActivePlacementsHonorsStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * ManualPlacementsHonorsStartsOnPage

                  Style * ActivePlacementsHonorsStartsOnPageOff
                    -->
                  Style * ManualPlacementsHonorsStartsOnPageOff

       Placement policy options and window stacking
              !UsePPosition instructs fvwm to ignore the program specified
              position (PPosition hint) when adding new windows.  Using
              PPosition is required for some applications, but if you do not
              have one of those it's a real headache.  Many programs set
              PPosition to something obnoxious like 0,0 (upper left corner).
              Note: !UsePPosition is equivalent to the deprecated option
              !UsePPosition

              !UseUSPosition works like !UsePPosition but applies suppresses
              using the user specified position indicated by the program
              (USPosition hint).  It is generally a bad thing to override the
              user's choice, but some applications misuse the USPosition hint
              to force their windows to a certain spot on the screen without
              the user's consent.  Note: !UseUSPosition is equivalent to the
              deprecated option !USPosition

              NoUseTransientPPosition and UseTransientPPosition work like
              !UsePPosition and UsePPosition but apply only to transient
              windows.  Note: !UseTransientPPosition is equivalent to the
              deprecated option !TransientPPosition

              NoUseIconPosition instructs fvwm to ignore the program specified
              icon position (IconPosition hint) when iconifying the window.
              Note: !UseIconPosition is equivalent to the deprecated option
              !IconPosition

              StartsOnDesk takes a numeric argument which is the desktop
              number on which the window should be initially placed.  Note
              that standard Xt programs can also specify this via a resource
              (e.g. "-xrm '*Desk: 1'").

              StartsOnPage takes 1, 2, or 3 numeric arguments.  If one or
              three arguments are given, the first (or only) argument is the
              desktop number.  If three arguments are given, the 2nd and 3rd
              arguments identify the x,y page position on the virtual window.
              If two arguments are given, they specify the page position, and
              indicate no desk preference.  If only one argument is given,
              StartsOnPage functions exactly like StartsOnDesk.  For those
              standard Xt programs which understand this usage, the starting
              desk/page can also be specified via a resource (e.g., "-xrm
              '*page: 1 0 2'").  StartsOnPage in conjunction with SkipMapping
              is a useful technique when you want to start an app on some
              other page and continue with what you were doing, rather than
              waiting for it to appear.

              StartsOnScreen takes one argument.  It can be 'p' for the
              primary screen, 'c' for the current screen (containing the mouse
              pointer), 'g' for the global screen or the screen number itself
              (counting from zero).  A new window is placed on the specified
              Xinerama screen.  The default is to place windows on the screen
              that contains the mouse pointer at the time the window is
              created.  However, those windows which are not placed by fvwm
              (i.e., those with a USPosition hint from a user specified
              geometry) are normally placed in a position relative to the
              global screen.  The StartsOnScreen style is also useful to cause
              these windows to be placed relative to a specific Xinerama
              screen.  For example:

                  Style * StartsOnScreen c

              Would cause all windows, including those with their own geometry
              to be placed relative to the current Xinerama screen rather than
              the global screen.  For those standard Xt programs which
              understand this usage, the starting desk/page can also be
              specified via a resource (e.g., "-xrm '*fvwmscreen: c'").
              ('fvwmscreen' was chosen because some applications already use
              ´.screen' for other purposes.)

              StartsOnPageIncludesTransients causes the StartsOnPage style to
              be applied even for transient windows.  This is not usually
              useful, since transients are usually pop ups that you want to
              appear in your visible viewport; but occasionally an application
              uses a transient for something like a startup window that needs
              to be coerced into place.

              ManualPlacementIgnoresStartsOnPage suppresses StartsOnPage or
              StartsOnDesk placement in the event that both ManualPlacement
              and SkipMapping are in effect when a window is created.  This
              prevents you from interactively placing a window and then
              wondering where it disappeared to, because it got placed on a
              different desk or page.  ManualPlacementHonorsStartsOnPage
              allows this to happen anyway.  The option has no effect if
              SkipMapping is not in effect, because fvwm switches to the
              proper desk/page to perform interactive placement.  The default
              is ManualPlacementIgnoresStartsOnPage;
              ManualPlacementHonorsStartsOnPage matches the way the old
              StartsOnDesk style used to handle the situation.

              CaptureHonorsStartsOnPage causes the initial capture (of an
              already existing window) at startup to place the window
              according to the StartsOnPage and StartsOnScreen desk, page and
              Xinerama screen specification.  CaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage
              causes fvwm to ignore these settings (including StartsOnDesk) on
              initial capture.  The default is CaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage.

              RecaptureHonorsStartsOnPage causes a window to be placed
              according to, or revert to, the StartsOnPage and StartsOnScreen
              desk, page and Xinerama screen specification on Restart or
              Recapture.  RecaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage causes fvwm to respect
              the current window position on Restart or Recapture.  The
              default is RecaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage.

              Layer accepts one optional argument: a non-negative integer.
              This is the layer the window is put in.  If no argument is
              given, any previously set value is deleted and the default layer
              is implied.

              StaysOnTop puts the window in the top layer.  This layer can be
              changed by the command DefaultLayers; the default is 6.

              StaysPut puts the window in the put layer.  This layer can be
              changed by the command DefaultLayers; the default is 4.

              StaysOnBottom puts the window in the bottom layer.  This layer
              can be changed by the command DefaultLayers; the default is 2.

              StartsLowered instructs fvwm to put the window initially at the
              bottom of its layer rather than the default StartsRaised.

              StartShaded tells fvwm to shade the window.  An optional
              direction argument may be given, which can be one of "North",
              "South", "West", "East", "NorthWest", "NorthEast", "SouthWest",
              "SouthEast" or if no direction is given, the default is to shade
              north.

              SkipMapping tells fvwm not to switch to the desk the window is
              on when it gets mapped initially (useful with StartsOnDesk or
              StartsOnPage).

              KeepWindowGroupsOnDesk makes new windows that have the window
              group hint set appear on the same desk as the other windows of
              the same group.  Since this behavior may be confusing, the
              default setting is ScatterWindowGroups.  The window group hint
              is ignored when placing windows in this case.

       Transient windows
              DecorateTransient causes transient windows, which are normally
              left undecorated, to be given the usual fvwm decorations (title
              bar, buttons, etc.).  Note that some pop-up windows, such as the
              xterm menus, are not managed by the window manager and still do
              not receive decorations.  NakedTransient (the default) causes
              transient windows not to be given the standard decorations.  You
              can only bind keys or mouse buttons to the sides and the client
              part of an undecorated window ('S' and ´W' contexts in bindings,
              see Mouse and Key commands).

              A window with the RaiseTransient style that has transient
              windows raises all its transients when it is raised.  The
              DontRaiseTransient style disables this behavior.  All windows
              are then treated as if they had no transients.

              A window with the LowerTransient style that has transient
              windows lowers all its transients when it is lowered.  The
              DontLowerTransient style disables this behavior.  All windows
              are then treated as if they had no transients.

              The StackTransientParent style augments RaiseTransient and
              LowerTransient styles.  Raising a window with
              StackTransientParent style transfers the raise action to the
              main window if the window being raised is a transient and its
              main window has RaiseTransient style; this effect makes raise on
              a transient act just like raise on its main - the whole group is
              raised.  Similar behavior holds for lowering a whole group of
              transients when the main has LowerTransient style.
              DontStackTransientParent turns this behavior off.
              (Dont)StackTransientParent has no effect if RaiseTransient and
              LowerTransient are not used.

              A reasonable emulation of Motif raise/lower on transients is
              possible like this

                  Style * RaiseTransient
                  Style * LowerTransient
                  Style * StackTransientParent

       Extended Window Manager Hints styles
              To understand the used terminology in this sub section, please
              read the Extended Window Manager Hints section.

              EWMHDonateIcon instructs fvwm to set the application ewmh icon
              hint with the icon that is used by fvwm if the application does
              not provide such hint (and if the icon used by fvwm is not an
              icon window).  EWMHDonateMiniIcon does the same thing for mini
              icons.  This allows compliant pager, taskbar, iconbox ...etc to
              display the same (mini) icons as fvwm.  Note that on some
              hardware (e.g., 8-bit displays) these styles can slow down
              window mapping and that in general only one of these styles is
              needed by a compliant application.  EWMHDontDonateIcon and
              EWMHDontDonateMiniIcon restore the defaults which are to not set
              any ewmh (mini) icons hints.

              By default, if an application provides an ewmh icon hint of
              small size (i.e., height and width less than or equal to 22),
              then fvwm uses this icon as its mini icon.  EWMHMiniIconOverride
              instructs fvwm to ignore ewmh icons and to use the mini icon
              provided by the MiniIcon style.  EWMHNoMiniIconOverride restores
              the default.

              EWMHUseStackingOrderHints causes fvwm to use EWMH hints and
              respect EWMH hints which change the window layer.
              EWMHIgnoreStackingOrderHints causes fvwm to ignore EWMH layer
              hints.

              An application can ask for some reserved space on the desktop by
              a hint.  In the EWMH terminology such a hint is called a strut
              and it is used to compute the working area and may be used for
              window placement and in the maximize command.
              EWMHIgnoreStrutHints causes fvwm to ignore such hints, as
              EWMHUseStrutHints, causes fvwm to use it which is the default.

              EWMHIgnoreStateHints causes fvwm to ignore initial EWMH state
              hints when a new window is mapped.  The default
              EWMHUseStateHints causes fvwm to accept such hints.

              EWMHIgnoreWindowType causes fvwm to ignore EWMH window type
              specification.  The default !EWMHIgnoreWindowType causes fvwm to
              style windows of specified types as such.

              EWMHMaximizeIgnoreWorkingArea causes fvwm to ignore the EWMH
              working area when it executes a Maximize command.  With
              EWMHMaximizeUseWorkingArea the EWMH working area is used as with
              EWMHMaximizeUseDynamicWorkingArea the EWMH dynamic working area
              is used (the default).

              EWMHPlacementIgnoreWorkingArea causes fvwm to ignore the EWMH
              working area when it places (or places again) a window.  With
              EWMHPlacementUseWorkingArea the EWMH working area is taken in
              account as with EWMHPlacementUseDynamicWorkingArea the EWMH
              dynamic working area is taken in account (the default).  Note
              that with the MinOverlapPlacement and MinOverlapPercentPlacement
              placement policy, the way the EWMH (dynamic) working area is
              taken in account is configurable with the
              MinOverlapPlacementPenalties style.

       Miscellaneous
              The BackingStore, BackingStoreOff and BackingStoreWindowDefault
              determine if the X server uses backing store for the window or
              not.  BackingStore means that the X server tries to keep the
              obscured parts of a window in memory.  This is usually slower if
              the client runs on the same machine as the X server, but can be
              much faster if the connection is slow (see also SaveUnder
              below).  BackingStoreOff disables backing store for the window.
              By default, fvwm does not enable or disable backing store itself
              but leaves is as the window requested it.  To revert back to the
              application's choice, use the BackingStoreWindowDefault style.

              Note: This style is useless if the X server does not allow
              backing store.

              SaveUnder enables the corresponding window attribute in the X
              server.  For a window using this style, the X server tries to
              store the graphics below it in memory which is usually slower if
              the client runs on the same machine as the X server.  SaveUnder
              may speed up fvwm if the connection to the X server is slow
              (e.g. over a modem link).  To disable save under, use the
              SaveUnderOff style.  This is the default.  See also BackingStore
              above.

              Note: This style is useless if the X server does not allow save
              under.

              ParentalRelativity enables clients that use a background pixmap
              of type ParentRelative to achieve transparency.  Fvwm modules
              that support transparent colorsets require this setting.
              Opacity is the default and should be used for all
              non-transparent clients for better performance.

              MwmDecor makes fvwm attempt to recognize and respect the mwm
              decoration hints that applications occasionally use.  To switch
              this style off, use the NoDecorHint style.

              MwmFunctions makes fvwm attempt to recognize and respect the mwm
              prohibited operations hints that applications occasionally use.
              HintOverride makes fvwm shade out operations that mwm would
              prohibit, but it lets you perform the operation anyway.
              NoFuncHint allows turns off the mwm hints completely.

              OLDecor makes fvwm attempt to recognize and respect the olwm and
              olvwm hints that many older XView and OLIT applications use.
              Switch this option off with NoOLDecor.

              With GNOMEIgnoreHints fvwm ignores all GNOME hints for the
              window, even if GNOME compliance is compiled in.  This is useful
              for those pesky applications that try to be more clever than the
              user and use GNOME hints to force the window manager to ignore
              the user's preferences.  The GNOMEUseHints style switches back
              to the default behavior.

              UseDecor This style is deprecated and will be removed in the
              future.  There are plans to replace it with a more flexible
              solution in fvwm-3.0.

              UseDecor accepts one argument: the name of a decor created with
              AddToDecor.  If no decor name is specified, the "Default" decor
              is used.  Windows do not actually contain decors, but are always
              assigned to one.  If the decor is later modified with
              AddToDecor, the changes are visible for all windows which are
              assigned to it.  The decor for a window can be reassigned with
              ChangeDecor.

              UseStyle This style is deprecated and will be removed in the
              future.  There are plans to replace it with a more flexible
              solution in fvwm-3.0.

              UseStyle takes one arg, which is the name of another style.
              That way you can have unrelated window names easily inherit
              similar traits without retyping.  For example:

                    Style rxvt UseStyle XTerm

              Warning: If a style is built from one or more parent styles and
              the parent styles are changed, the derived style is not
              modified.  To achieve this you have to issue the UseStyle line
              again.

              Unmanaged Windows with the Unmanaged style option are ignored by
              fvwm.  They are not decorated, can not be moved or resized, etc.
              You probably want to use Bugopts RaiseOverUnmanaged too.  This
              option can be turned off with the !Unmanaged style.  However,
              windows that are already ignored at the time when the option is
              set must be recaptured with the Recapture command in order to
              become managed.

              State sets the initial value of one of the 32 user defined
              states which are associated with each window.  The state number
              ranges from 0 to 31 and must be given as an argument.  The
              states have no meaning in fvwm, but they can be checked in
              conditional commands like Next with the State condition and
              manipulated with the State command.

                  # turn on state 11 for xterms ...
                  Style xterm State 11
                  # ... but not for rxvts.
                  Style rxvt !State 11


              Windows with the WindowListSkip styles do not appear in the menu
              that is created with the WindowList command or the lists shown
              in modules like FvwmIconMan.  In the modules, the style can
              usually be ignored with an option.  Please refer to the man page
              of the module in question for further information.  To disable
              this feature, use the default style WindowListHit.

              The styles CirculateSkip and CirculateHit control whether the
              window is considered by conditional commands, for example Next,
              Prev or All.  Windows with CirculateSkip, are never selected by
              conditional commands.  However, the styles can be overridden
              explicitly in the condition with the CirculateHit,
              CirculateHitIcon or CirculateHitShaded conditions, and some
              conditional commands, e.g.  Current and All, do this by default.
              The styles CirculateSkipIcon, CirculateHitIcon,
              CirculateSkipShaded and CirculateHitShaded work like
              CirculateSkip and CirculateHit but apply only to iconic or
              shaded windows.  Note: if multiple ...Skip... options are
              combined, windows are only selected if they match none of the
              given conditions.  So, with

                  Style * CirculateSkipIcon, CirculateSkipShaded

              only windows that are neither iconic nor shaded are selected.
              Note: For historical reasons, the conditional commands
              understand the names of these styles as condition names.  Take
              care not to confuse them.

       Examples

                  # Change default fvwm behavior to no title-
                  # bars on windows! Also define a default icon.
                  Style *             !Title,                \
                                      Icon unknown1.xpm,     \
                                      BorderWidth 4,         \
                                      HandleWidth 5

                  # now, window specific changes:
                  Style Fvwm*       !Handles, Sticky,        \
                                    WindowListSkip,          \
                                    BorderWidth 0
                  Style FvwmPager   StaysOnTop, BorderWidth 0
                  Style *lock       !Handles, Sticky,        \
                                    StaysOnTop, WindowListSkip
                  Style xbiff       Sticky, WindowListSkip
                  Style FvwmButtons !Handles, Sticky,        \
                                    WindowListSkip
                  Style sxpm        !Handles

                  # Put title-bars back on xterms only!
                  Style xterm     Title, Color black/grey

                  Style rxvt        Icon term.xpm
                  Style xterm       Icon rterm.xpm
                  Style xcalc       Icon xcalc.xpm
                  Style xbiff       Icon mail1.xpm
                  Style xmh         Icon mail1.xpm,         \
                                      StartsOnDesk 2
                  Style xman        Icon xman.xpm
                  Style matlab      Icon math4.xpm,         \
                                      StartsOnDesk 3
                  Style xmag        Icon magnifying_glass2.xpm
                  Style xgraph      Icon graphs.xpm
                  Style FvwmButtons Icon toolbox.xpm
                  Style Maker       StartsOnDesk 1
                  Style signal      StartsOnDesk 3

                  # Fire up Netscape on the second desk, in the
                  # middle of my 3x3 virtual desktop, and do not
                  # bother me with it...
                  Style Netscape* SkipMapping,              \
                                  StartsOnPage 1 1 1

              Note that all properties for a window are or'ed together.  In
              the above example "FvwmPager" gets the property StaysOnTop via
              an exact window name match but also gets !Handles, Sticky and
              WindowListSkip by a match to "Fvwm*".  It gets !Title by virtue
              of a match to "*".  If conflicting styles are specified for a
              window, then the last style specified is used.

       WindowStyle options
              sets attributes (styles) on the selected window.  The options
              are exactly the same as for the Style command.

   Window Styles
       AddButtonStyle button [state] [style] [-- [!]flag ...]
              Adds a button style to button.  button can be a button number,
              or one of "All", "Left" or "Right".  state can be "ActiveUp",
              "ActiveDown", "InactiveUp" or "InactiveDown", or "Active" (the
              same as both "ActiveUp" and "ActiveDown") or "Inactive" (the
              same as both "InactiveUp" and "InactiveDown") or any of these 6
              with "Toggled" prepended.  The "Active" states apply to the
              focused window, the "Inactive" ones apply to all other windows.
              The "Up" states apply to the non pressed buttons, the "Down"
              ones apply to pressed buttons.  The "Toggled" prefix refers to
              maximized, shaded or sticky windows that have the corresponding
              MwmDecor...  button style set.  Additionally, the following
              shortcuts may be used: "AllNormal", "AllToggled", "AllActive",
              "AllInactive", "AllUp", "AllDown".  They are actually different
              masks for 4 individual states from 8 total.  These are supported
              too: "AllActiveUp", "AllActiveDown", "AllInactiveUp",
              "AllInactiveDown".

              If state is omitted, then the style is added to every state.  If
              the style and flags are enclosed in parentheses, then multiple
              state definitions can be placed on a single line.  Flags for
              additional button styles cannot be changed after definition.

              Buttons are drawn in the order of definition, beginning with the
              most recent button style, followed by those added with
              AddButtonStyle.  To clear the button style stack, change style
              flags, or for descriptions of available styles and flags, see
              the ButtonStyle command.  Examples:

                  ButtonStyle 1 Pixmap led.xpm -- Top Left
                  ButtonStyle 1 ActiveDown HGradient 8 grey black
                  ButtonStyle All --  UseTitleStyle
                  AddButtonStyle 1 \
                       ActiveUp (Pixmap a.xpm) \
                       ActiveDown (Pixmap b.xpm -- Top)
                  AddButtonStyle 1 Vector 4 50x30@1 70x70@0 30x70@0 50x30@1

              Initially for this example all button states are set to a
              pixmap.  The second line replaces the "ActiveDown" state with a
              gradient (it overrides the pixmap assigned to it in the line
              before, which assigned the same style to every state).  Then,
              the UseTitleStyle flag is set for all buttons, which causes fvwm
              to draw any styles set with TitleStyle before drawing the
              buttons.  Finally, AddButtonStyle is used to place additional
              pixmaps for both "ActiveUp" and "ActiveDown" states and a vector
              button style is drawn on top of all states.

       AddTitleStyle [state] [style] [-- [!]flag ...]
              Adds a title style to the title-bar.  state can be "ActiveUp",
              "ActiveDown", "InactiveUp" or "InactiveDown", or "Active" (the
              same as both "ActiveUp" and "ActiveDown") or "Inactive" (the
              same as both "InactiveUp" and "InactiveDown") or any of these 6
              with "Toggled" prepended.  If state is omitted, then the style
              is added to every state.  If the style and flags are enclosed in
              parentheses, then multiple state definitions can be placed on a
              single line.  This command is quite similar to the
              AddButtonStyle command.

              Title-bars are drawn in the order of definition, beginning with
              the most recent TitleStyle, followed by those added with
              AddTitleStyle.  To clear the title style stack, change style
              flags, or for the descriptions of available styles and flags,
              see the TitleStyle and ButtonStyle commands.

       AddToDecor decor
              This command is deprecated and will be removed in the future.
              There are plans to replace it with a more flexible solution in
              fvwm-3.0.

              Add or divert commands to the decor named decor.  A decor is a
              name given to the set of commands which affect button styles,
              title-bar styles and border styles.  If decor does not exist it
              is created; otherwise the existing decor is modified.  Note:
              Earlier versions allowed to use the HilightColor,
              HilightColorset and WindowFont commands in decors.  This is no
              longer possible.  Please use the Style command with the
              Hilight... and Font options.

              New decors start out exactly like the "default" decor without
              any style definitions.  A given decor may be applied to a set of
              windows with the UseDecor option of the Style command.
              Modifying an existing decor affects all windows which are
              currently assigned to it.

              AddToDecor is similar in usage to the AddToMenu and AddToFunc
              commands, except that menus and functions are replaced by
              ButtonStyle, AddButtonStyle, TitleStyle, AddTitleStyle and
              BorderStyle commands.  Decors created with AddToDecor can be
              manipulated with ChangeDecor, DestroyDecor, UpdateDecor and the
              Style option.

              The following example creates a decor "FlatDecor" and style
              "FlatStyle".  They are distinct entities:

                  AddToDecor FlatDecor
                  + ButtonStyle All Active (-- flat) Inactive (-- flat)
                  + TitleStyle  -- flat
                  + BorderStyle -- HiddenHandles NoInset

                  Style FlatStyle \
                       UseDecor FlatDecor, HandleWidth 4, ForeColor white, \
                       BackColor grey40, HilightFore black, HilightBack grey70

                  Style xterm UseStyle FlatStyle

              An existing window's decor may be reassigned with ChangeDecor.
              A decor can be destroyed with DestroyDecor.

                  DestroyDecor FlatDecor
                  AddToDecor FlatDecor ...

                  Style FlatStyle UseDecor FlatDecor

              and now apply the style again:

                  Style xterm UseStyle FlatStyle

       BorderStyle state [style] [-- [!]flag ...]
              Defines a border style for windows.  state can be either
              "Active" or "Inactive".  If state is omitted, then the style is
              set for both states.  If the style and flags are enclosed in
              parentheses, then multiple state definitions can be specified
              per line.

              style is a subset of the available button styles, and can only
              be TiledPixmap (uniform pixmaps which match the bevel colors
              work best this way) or Colorset.  If a '!' is prefixed to any
              flag, the behavior is negated.  If style is not specified, then
              one can change flags without resetting the style.

              The HiddenHandles flag hides the corner handle dividing lines on
              windows with handles (this option has no effect for !Handles
              windows).  By default, HiddenHandles is disabled.

              The NoInset flag supplements HiddenHandles.  If given, the inner
              bevel around the window frame is not drawn.  If HiddenHandles is
              not specified, the frame looks a little strange.

              Raised causes a raised relief pattern to be drawn (default).
              Sunk causes a sunken relief pattern to be drawn.  Flat inhibits
              the relief pattern from being drawn.

              To decorate the active and inactive window borders with a
              textured pixmap, one might specify:

                  BorderStyle Active TiledPixmap marble.xpm
                  BorderStyle Inactive TiledPixmap granite.xpm
                  BorderStyle Active -- HiddenHandles NoInset

              To clear the style for both states:

                  BorderStyle Simple

              To clear for a single state:

                  BorderStyle Active Simple

              To unset a flag for a given state:

                  BorderStyle Inactive -- !NoInset

              title-bar buttons can inherit the border style with the
              UseBorderStyle flag (see ButtonStyle).

       ButtonState [ActiveDown bool] [Inactive bool] [InactiveDown bool]
              The ButtonState command controls which states of the window
              titles and title buttons are used.  The default is to use all
              four states: "ActiveUp", "ActiveDown", "InactiveUp" and
              "InactiveDown" (see ButtonStyle and TitleStyle commands).  The
              bool argument after the key word controls if the designated
              state is used ("True") or not ("False").  The bool flag is the
              same as other commands, and not limited to just "True" or
              "False"; "Yes" and "No" may also be used.  The "ActiveUp" state
              cannot be deactivated.  If no arguments are provided or the
              given arguments are illegal, the default is restored.

              If ActiveDown argument is "False", no different button style for
              the pressed down buttons used, instead "ActiveUp" state is used
              even when button is pressed.

              If Inactive argument is "False", focused and unfocused windows
              look similarly, the corresponding "Active" states are always
              used.

              If InactiveDown argument is "False" (only applied when Inactive
              is "True"), the pressed titles and title buttons in non-focused
              windows are drawn using "InactiveUp" or "ActiveUp" states
              depending on the values of the other key words.

       ButtonStyle button [state] [style] [-- [!]flag ...]
              Sets the button style for a title-bar button.  button is the
              title-bar button number between 0 and 9, or one of "All",
              "Left", "Right", or "Reset".  Button numbering is described in
              the Mouse command section.  If the style and flags are enclosed
              in parentheses, then multiple state definitions can be specified
              per line.

              state refers to which button state should be set.  Button states
              are defined as follows: "ActiveUp" and "ActiveDown" refer to the
              un-pressed and pressed states for buttons on active windows;
              while the "InactiveUp" and "InactiveDown" states denote buttons
              on inactive windows.  The shortcut "Active" denotes both
              "ActiveUp" and "ActiveDown" states.  Shortcut "Inactive" denotes
              both "InactiveUp" and "InactiveDown" states.  The similar state
              names like just described, but with the "Toggled" prefix are
              used instead for title buttons which have one of the
              MwmDecorMax, MwmDecorShade, MwmDecorStick or MwmDecorLayer
              hints, if the window is maximized, shaded, sticky or placed on
              specific layer, respectively.

                  AddToDecor Default
                   + ButtonStyle 6                   \
                     Vector 4 50x25@1 85x75@0 15x75@0 50x25@1
                   + ButtonStyle 6 ToggledActiveUp   \
                     Vector 4 50x75@0 85x25@1 15x25@0 50x75@0
                   + ButtonStyle 6 ToggledActiveDown \
                     Vector 4 50x75@0 85x25@1 15x25@0 50x75@0
                   + ButtonStyle 6 ToggledInactive   \
                     Vector 4 50x75@0 85x25@1 15x25@0 50x75@0
                   + ButtonStyle 6 - MwmDecorShade
                  Mouse 0 6 N WindowShade

              Additionally, the following shortcuts may be used: "AllNormal",
              "AllToggled", "AllActive", "AllInactive", "AllUp", "AllDown".
              They are actually different masks for 4 individual states from 8
              total.  These are supported too: "AllActiveUp", "AllActiveDown",
              "AllInactiveUp", "AllInactiveDown".

              If state is specified, that particular button state is set.  If
              state is omitted, every state is set.  Specifying a style
              destroys the current style (use AddButtonStyle to avoid this).

              If style is omitted, then state-dependent flags can be set for
              the primary button style without destroying the current style.
              Examples (each line should be considered independent):

                  ButtonStyle Left -- flat
                  ButtonStyle All ActiveUp (-- flat) Inactive (-- flat)

              The first line sets every state of the left buttons to flat,
              while the second sets only the "ActiveUp" and "Inactive" states
              of every button to flat (only flags are changed; the buttons'
              individual styles are not changed).

              If you want to reset all buttons to their defaults:

                  ButtonStyle Reset

              To reset the "ActiveUp" button state of button 1 to the default:

                  ButtonStyle 1 ActiveUp Default

              To reset all button states of button 1 to the default of button
              number 2:

                  ButtonStyle 1 Default 2

              For any button, multiple state definitions can be given on one
              line by enclosing the style and flags in parentheses.  If only
              one definition per line is given the parentheses can be omitted.

              flags affect the specified state.  If a '!'  is prefixed to any
              flag, its behavior is negated.  The available state-dependent
              flags for all styles are described here (the ButtonStyle entry
              deals with state-independent flags).

              Raised causes a raised relief pattern to be drawn.

              Sunk causes a sunken relief pattern to be drawn.

              Flat inhibits the relief pattern from being drawn.

              UseTitleStyle causes the given button state to render the
              current title style before rendering the buttons' own styles.
              The Raised, Flat and Sunk TitleStyle flags are ignored since
              they are redundant in this context.

              UseBorderStyle causes the button to inherit the decorated
              BorderStyle options.

              Raised, Sunk and Flat are mutually exclusive, and can be
              specified for the initial ButtonStyle only.  UseTitleStyle and
              UseBorderStyle are also mutually exclusive (both can be off
              however).  The default is Raised with both UseBorderStyle and
              UseTitleStyle left unset.

              Important
              for the "ActiveDown" and "InactiveDown" states:  When a button
              is pressed, the relief is inverted.  Because of this, to obtain
              the raised look in "ActiveDown" or "InactiveDown" states you
              must specify the opposite of the desired relief (i.e.  Sunk for
              "ActiveDown" or "InactiveDown").  This behavior is consistent,
              but may seem confusing at first.  The same applies to the
              "Toggled" states.

              Button styles are classified as non-destructive, partially
              destructive, or fully destructive.  Non-destructive styles do
              not affect the image.  Partially destructive styles can obscure
              some or all parts of the underlying image (i.e.  Pixmap).  Fully
              destructive styles obscure the entire underlying image (i.e.
              Solid or one of the gradient styles).  Thus, if stacking styles
              with AddButtonStyle (or AddTitleStyle for title-bars), use care
              in sequencing styles to minimize redraw.

              The available styles are:

              Simple, Default, Solid, Colorset, Vector, ?Gradient, Pixmap,
              AdjustedPixmap, ShrunkPixmap, StretchedPixmap, TiledPixmap,
              MiniIcon

              The description of these styles and their arguments follow:

              The Simple style does nothing.  There are no arguments, and this
              style is an example of a non-destructive button style.

              The Default style conditionally accepts one argument: a number
              which specifies the default button number to load.  If the style
              command given is ButtonStyle or AddButtonStyle, the argument is
              optional (if given, it overrides the current button).  If a
              command other than ButtonStyle or AddButtonStyle is used, the
              number must be specified.

              The Solid style fills the button with a solid color.  The relief
              border color is not affected.  The color is specified as a
              single argument.  This style is fully destructive.

              The Colorset cs [alpha] style fills the button with the Colorset
              cs.  The optional alpha argument is a percentage between 0 and
              100.  It causes fvwm to merge the colorset background onto the
              button using this percentage.  If the percentage is 0 the
              colorset background is hidden and if it is 100 the colorset
              background is fully applied.  The default is 100.  So, the
              destructiveness depends on the alpha argument.

              The Vector num X[offsetp]xY[offsetp]@C ...  style draws a line
              pattern.  Since this is a standard button style, the keyword
              Vector is optional, num is a number of point specifications of
              the form X[offsetp]xY[offsetp]@C ...  X and Y are point
              coordinates inside the button, given in percents (from 0 to
              100).  An optional absolute offset in pixels, can be given as
              "+<offset>p" for a positive or "-<offset>p" for a negative
              offset.

              C specifies a line color (0 - the shadow color, 1 - the
              highlight color, 2 - the background color, 3 - the foreground
              color, 4 - only move the point, do not draw).  The first point
              color is not used.  You can use up to 10000 points in a line
              pattern.  This style is partially destructive.

              The specification is a little cumbersome:

                  ButtonStyle 2 Vector 4 50x30@1 70x70@0 30x70@0 50x30@1

              then the button 2 decoration uses a 4-point pattern consisting
              of a line from (x=50,y=30) to (70,70) in the shadow color (@0),
              and then to (30,70) in the shadow color, and finally to (50,30)
              in the highlight color (@1).  Is that too confusing? See the
              fvwm web pages for some examples with screenshots.

              A more complex example of Vector:

                  ButtonStyle 8 Vector 10 45x65@2 45x75@3 \
                    20x75@3 20x50@3 35x50@3 35x65@1 35x25@1 \
                    75x25@1 75x65@0 35x65@0
                  ButtonStyle 0 Vector 10 45x65@2 45x75@0 \
                    20x75@0 20x50@1 45x50@1 45x65@0 75x65@3 \
                    75x25@3 35x25@3 35x47@3

              The ?Gradient styles denote color gradients.  Fill in the
              question mark with any one of the defined gradient types.
              Please refer to the Color Gradients section for a description of
              the gradient syntax.  The gradient styles are fully destructive.

              The Pixmap style displays a pixmap.  A pixmap should be
              specified as an argument.  For example, the following would give
              button number 2 the same pixmap for all 4 states (2 active and 2
              inactive), and button number 4 all different pixmaps.

                  ButtonStyle 2 Pixmap my_pixmap.xpm
                  ButtonStyle 4 \
                       ActiveUp (Pixmap activeup.xpm) \
                       ActiveDown (Pixmap activedown.xpm) \
                       Inactive (Pixmap inactiveup.xpm)
                  ButtonStyle 4 \
                       InactiveDown Pixmap inactivedown.xpm

              The pixmap specification can be given as an absolute or relative
              pathname (see ImagePath).  If the pixmap cannot be found, the
              button style reverts to Simple.  Flags specific to the Pixmap
              style are Left, Right, Top, and Bottom.  These can be used to
              justify the pixmap (default is centered for both directions).
              Pixmap transparency is used for the color "None." This style is
              partially destructive.

              The AdjustedPixmap style is similar to the Pixmap style.  But
              the image is resized to exactly fit the button.

              The ShrunkPixmap style is similar to the Pixmap style.  But if
              the image is bigger than the button the image is resized to fit
              into the button.

              The StretchedPixmap style is similar to the Pixmap style.  But
              if the image is smaller than the button the image is resized to
              cover the button.

              The TiledPixmap style accepts a pixmap to be tiled as the button
              background.  One pixmap is specified as an argument.  Pixmap
              transparency is not used.  This style is fully destructive.

              The MiniIcon style draws the window's miniature icon in the
              button, which is specified with the MiniIcon option of the Style
              command.  This button style accepts no arguments.  Example:

                  Style *     MiniIcon mini-bx2.xpm
                  Style xterm MiniIcon mini-term.xpm
                  Style Emacs MiniIcon mini-doc.xpm

                  ButtonStyle 1 MiniIcon

       ButtonStyle button - [!]flag ...
              Sets state-independent flags for the specified button.
              State-independent flags affect button behavior.  Each flag is
              separated by a space.  If a '!'  is prefixed to the flag then
              the behavior is negated.  The special flag Clear clears any
              existing flags.

              The following flags are usually used to tell fvwm which buttons
              should be affected by mwm function hints (see MwmFunctions
              option of the Style command.  This is not done automatically
              since you might have buttons bound to complex functions, for
              instance.

              MwmDecorMenu should be assigned to title-bar buttons which
              display a menu.  The default assignment is the leftmost button.
              When a window with the MwmFunctions Style option requests not to
              show this button, it is hidden.

              MwmDecorMin should be assigned to title-bar buttons which
              minimize or iconify the window.  The default assignment is the
              second button over from the rightmost button.  When a window
              with the MwmFunctions Style option requests not to show this
              button, it is hidden.

              MwmDecorMax should be assigned to title-bar buttons which
              maximize the window.  The default assignment is the rightmost
              button.  When a window with the MwmFunctions Style option
              requests not to show this button, it is hidden.  When the window
              is maximized, the vector pattern on the button looks pressed in.

              MwmDecorShade should be assigned to title-bar buttons which
              shade the window (see WindowShade command).  When the window is
              shaded, the vector pattern on the button looks pressed in.

              MwmDecorStick should be assigned to title-bar buttons which make
              the window sticky.  When the window is sticky, the vector
              pattern on the button looks pressed in.

              The flag MwmDecorLayer layer should be assigned to title-bar
              buttons which place the window in the layer numbered layer.
              When the window is on that specific layer, the vector pattern on
              the button looks pressed in.

       ChangeDecor decor
              This command is deprecated and will be removed in the future.
              There are plans to replace it with a more flexible solution in
              fvwm-3.0.

              Changes the decor of a window to decor.  decor is "Default" or
              the name of a decor defined with AddToDecor.  If decor is
              invalid, nothing occurs.  If called from somewhere in a window
              or its border, then that window is affected.  If called from the
              root window the user is allowed to select the target window.
              ChangeDecor only affects attributes which can be set using the
              AddToDecor command.

                  ChangeDecor CustomDecor1

       DestroyDecor [recreate] decor
              This command is deprecated and will be removed in the future.
              There are plans to replace it with a more flexible solution in
              fvwm-3.0.

              Deletes the decor defined with AddToDecor, so that subsequent
              references to it are no longer valid.  Windows using this decor
              revert to the "Default" decor.  The optional parameter recreate
              tells fvwm not to throw away the decor completely but to throw
              away only its contents.  If the decor is created again later,
              windows do not use it before the UseDecor style is applied again
              unless the decor was destroyed with the recreate option.  The
              decor named "Default" cannot be destroyed.

                  DestroyDecor CustomDecor1

       TitleStyle [justification] [Height [num]] [MinHeight [num]]
              Sets attributes for the title-bar.  Justifications can be
              Centered, RightJustified or LeftJustified.  Height sets the
              title bar's height to an amount in pixels.  MinHeight sets the
              minimal height in pixels of the title bar.  Defaults are
              Centered, the window's font height and no minimal height.  To
              reset the font height to the default value, omit the num
              argument after the Height keyword.  The MinHeight height is
              reset by Height or if given with no argument.  Example:

                  TitleStyle LeftJustified Height 24

       TitleStyle [state] [style] [-- [!]flag ...]
              Sets the style for the title-bar.  See also AddTitleStyle and
              ButtonStyle state can be one of "ActiveUp", "ActiveDown",
              "InactiveUp", or "InactiveDown".  Shortcuts like "Active" and
              "Inactive" are allowed.  The states with the "Toggled" prefix
              are allowed too, the title itself does not use "Toggled" states,
              but these states are used for the buttons with ButtonStyle
              UseTitleStyle.  If state is omitted, then the style is added to
              every state.  If parentheses are placed around the style and
              flags, then multiple state definitions can be given per line.
              style can be omitted so that flags can be set while not
              destroying the current style.

              If a '!'  is prefixed to any flag, its behavior is negated.
              Valid flags for each state include Raised, Flat and Sunk (these
              are mutually exclusive).  The default is Raised.  See the note
              in ButtonStyle regarding the "ActiveDown" state.  Examples:

                  TitleStyle ActiveUp HGradient 16 navy black
                  TitleStyle \
                       ActiveDown (Solid red -- flat) \
                       Inactive (TiledPixmap wood.xpm)
                  TitleStyle \
                       ActiveUp (-- Flat) \
                       ActiveDown (-- Raised) \
                       InactiveUp (-- Flat) \
                       InactiveDown (-- Sunk)

              This sets the "ActiveUp" state to a horizontal gradient, the
              "ActiveDown" state to solid red, and the "Inactive" states to a
              tiled wood pixmap.  Finally, "ActiveUp" and "InactiveUp" are set
              to look flat, while "ActiveDown" set to be sunk (the Raised flag
              for the "ActiveDown" state causes it to appear sunk due to
              relief inversion), and "InactiveDown" is set to look raised.  An
              example which sets flags for all states:

                  TitleStyle -- flat

              For a flattened look:

                  TitleStyle -- flat
                  ButtonStyle All Active (-- flat) Inactive (-- flat)

              TitleStyle accepts all the ButtonStyle styles and arguments:

              Simple, Default, Solid, Colorset, Vector, ?Gradient, Pixmap,
              AdjustedPixmap, ShrunkPixmap, StretchedPixmap, TiledPixmap,
              MiniIcon.

              See the ButtonStyle command for a description of all these
              styles and their arguments.

              In addition to these styles TitleStyle accepts a powerful
              MultiPixmap option.  This allows you to specify different
              pixmaps, colorsets or colors for different parts of the
              titlebar.  Some of them are tiled or stretched to fit a
              particular space; others are discrete "transition" images.  The
              definable sections are:

              Main
                  The full titlebar

              LeftMain
                  Left of title text

              RightMain
                  Right of title text

              UnderText
                  Underneath title text

              LeftOfText
                  just to the left of the title text

              RightOfText
                  just to the right of the title text

              LeftEnd
                  at the far left end of the titlebar (just after left buttons
                  if any)

              RightEnd
                  at the far right end of the titlebar (just before right
                  buttons if any)

              Buttons
                  under buttons in case of UseTitleStyle

              LeftButtons
                  under left buttons in case of UseTitleStyle

              RightButtons
                  under right buttons in case of UseTitleStyle

              None of these are mandatory except for Main (or, if you do not
              define Main you must define both LeftMain and RightMain).  If no
              Buttons pixmaps are defined and UseTitleStyle is specified for
              one or more buttons, Main, LeftMain or RightMain are used as
              appropriate.

              The syntax for this style type is:

                  MultiPixmap section style arg, ...

              continuing for whatever you want to define.  The style can be
              either TiledPixmap, AdjustedPixmap, Colorset or Solid.  See the
              ButtonStyle command for the description of these styles.  In the
              case of a transition section, LeftEnd, LeftOfText, RightOfText
              or RightEnd, AdjustedPixmap only resize the pixmap in the "y"
              direction.  For the Colorset and Solid styles a width of the
              half of the title bar height is assumed for the transition
              sections.

              An example:

                  MultiPixmap Main AdjustedPixmap foo.xpm, \
                              UnderText TiledPixmap bar.xpm, \
                              Buttons Colorset 2

              Note that the old syntax is still supported: if the style is
              omitted, TiledPixmap is assumed and adding "(stretched)" between
              the section and the file name implies AdjustedPixmap.

       UpdateDecor [decor]
              This command is deprecated and will be removed in the future.
              There are plans to replace it with a more flexible solution in
              fvwm-3.0.

              This command is kept mainly for backward compatibility.  Since
              all elements of a decor are updated immediately when they are
              changed, this command is mostly useless.

              Updates window decorations.  decor is an optional argument which
              specifies the decor to update.  If given, only windows which are
              assigned to that particular decor are updated.  This command is
              useful, for instance, after a ButtonStyle, TitleStyle or
              BorderStyle (possibly used in conjunction with AddToDecor).
              Specifying an invalid decor results in all windows being
              updated.  This command is less disturbing than Recapture, but
              does not affect window style options as Recapture does.

   Controlling the Virtual Desktop
       Desk arg1 [arg2] [min max]
              This command has been renamed.  Please see GotoDesk command.

       DesktopName desk name
              Defines the name of the desktop number desk to name.  This name
              is used in the WindowList command and in the FvwmPager where it
              override the Label configuration option.  Moreover, if
              consecutive names starting from desktop 0 are defined, then
              these names can be used by any EWMH compliant application (as a
              pager).

       DesktopSize HorizontalxVertical
              Defines the virtual desktop size in units of the physical screen
              size.

       EdgeResistance delayEdgeResistance scrolling moving
       [xinerama-scrolling]
              Tells how hard it should be to change the desktop viewport by
              moving the mouse over the edge of the screen.  The parameter
              tells how many milliseconds the pointer must spend on the screen
              edge before fvwm moves the viewport.  This is intended for
              people who use

                  EdgeScroll 100 100

              but find themselves accidentally flipping pages when they do not
              want to.  If -1 is given as the delay, scrolling is disabled
              completely.

              The second form of invocation with two or three arguments is
              obsolete and should be replaced with the following three
              commands as needed:

                  EdgeResistance scrolling
                  Style * EdgeMoveDelay scrolling
                  Style * EdgeMoveResistance moving
                  or
                  Style * EdgeMoveResistance moving xinerama-scrolling

              Fvwm does this substitution automatically and prints a warning.

       EdgeScroll horizontal[p] vertical[p] [wrap | wrapx | wrapy]
              Specifies the percentage of a page to scroll when the cursor
              hits the edge of a page.  A trailing 'p' changes the
              interpretation to mean pixels.  If you do not want any paging or
              scrolling when you hit the edge of a page include

                  EdgeScroll 0 0

              in your config file, or possibly better, set the EdgeThickness
              to zero.  See the EdgeThickness command.  If you want whole
              pages, use

                  EdgeScroll 100 100

              Both horizontal and vertical should be positive numbers.

              If the horizontal and vertical percentages are multiplied by
              1000 or one of the keywords wrap, wrapx and wrapy is given then
              scrolling wraps around at the edge of the desktop.  If

                  EdgeScroll 100000 100000

              is used fvwm scrolls by whole pages, wrapping around at the edge
              of the desktop.

       EdgeThickness 0 | 1 | 2
              This is the width or height of the invisible window that fvwm
              creates on the edges of the screen that are used for the edge
              scrolling feature.

              In order to enable page scrolling via the mouse, four windows
              called the "pan frames" are placed at the very edge of the
              screen.  This is how fvwm detects the mouse's presence at the
              window edge.  Because of the way this works, they need to be at
              the top of the stack and eat mouse events, so if you have any
              kind of error along the lines of: "mouse clicks at the edge of
              the screen do the wrong thing" you're having trouble with the
              pan frames and (assuming you do not use the mouse to flip
              between pages) should set the EdgeThickness to 0.

              A value of 0 completely disables mouse edge scrolling, even
              while dragging a window.  1 gives the smallest pan frames, which
              seem to work best except on some servers.

              2 is the default.

              Pan frames of 1 or 2 pixels can sometimes be confusing, for
              example, if you drag a window over the edge of the screen, so
              that it straddles a pan frame, clicks on the window, near the
              edge of the screen are treated as clicks on the root window.

       EwmhBaseStruts left right top bottom
              Where left, right, top and bottom are positive or null integers
              which define bands at the edge of the screen.  left defines a
              band on the left of your screen of width left, right defines a
              band on the right of your screen of width right, top defines a
              band on the top of your screen of height top and bottom defines
              a band on the bottom of your screen of height bottom.  The unit
              is the pixel and the default is 0 0 0 0.  These areas define
              additional reserved space to the reserved space defined by some
              ewmh compliant applications.  This is used to compute the
              Working Area.  See the Extended Window Manager Hints section for
              a definition of the Working Area.

       EwmhNumberOfDesktops num [max]
              This command is useful only for an ewmh compliant pager or
              taskbar (as kpager or kicker taskbar) and not for fvwm modules (
              FvwmPager or FvwmIconMan).  It causes a compliant application to
              consider at least num desktops (desktop 0 to desktop num-1).
              The optional argument max causes a compliant application to
              never consider more than max desktops.  If max is 0 (the
              default) there is no limitation.  The actual number of desktops
              is determined dynamically.  It is at least num, but it can be d
              if there is a window on desktop d-1 (or if the current desktop
              is desktop d-1) and d is less or equal to max or max is null.
              Moreover, a compliant pager can ask to change num itself.  This
              is accepted by fvwm only if this number is less than or equal to
              max or if max is null.  Note that negative desktops are not
              supported by the ewmh specification.  The default is 4 0.

       GotoDesk [prev | arg1 [arg2] [min max]]
              Switches the current viewport to another desktop (workspace,
              room).

              The command takes 1, 2, 3, or 4 arguments.  A single argument is
              interpreted as a relative desk number.  Two arguments are
              understood as a relative and an absolute desk number.  Three
              arguments specify a relative desk and the minimum and maximum of
              the allowable range.  Four arguments specify the relative,
              absolute, minimum and maximum values.  (Desktop numbers can be
              negative).  If a literal prev is given as the single argument,
              the last visited desk number is used.

              If arg1 is non zero then the next desktop number is the current
              desktop number plus arg1.

              If arg1 is zero then the new desktop number is arg2.  (If arg2
              is not present, then the command has no effect.)

              If min and max are given, the new desktop number is no smaller
              than min and no bigger than max.  Values out of this range are
              truncated (if you gave an absolute desk number) or wrapped
              around (if you gave a relative desk number).

              The syntax is the same as for MoveToDesk, which moves a window
              to a different desktop.

              The number of active desktops is determined dynamically.  Only
              desktops which contain windows or are currently being displayed
              are active.  Desktop numbers must be between 2147483647 and
              -2147483648 (is that enough?).

       GotoDeskAndPage prev | desk xpage ypage
              Switches the current viewport to another desktop and page,
              similar to the GotoDesk and GotoPage commands.  The new desk is
              desk and the new page is (xpage,ypage).

       GotoPage prev | [options] x[p] y[p]
              Moves the desktop viewport to page (x,y).  The upper left page
              is (0,0), the upper right is (M,0), where M is one less than the
              current number of horizontal pages specified in the DesktopSize
              command.  The lower left page is (0,N), and the lower right page
              is (M,N), where N is the desktop's vertical size as specified in
              the DesktopSize command.  To switch to a page relative to the
              current one add a trailing 'p' after any or both numerical
              arguments.

              Possible options are wrapx and wrapy to wrap around the x or y
              coordinate when the viewport is moved beyond the border of the
              desktop.

              To go to the last visited page use prev as the first argument.
              The GotoPage function should not be used in a pop-up menu.

              Examples:

                  # Go to page (2,3)
                  GotoPage 2 3

                  # Go to lowest and rightmost page
                  GotoPage -1 -1

                  # Go to last page visited
                  GotoPage prev

                  # Go two pages to the right and one page up
                  GotoPage +2p -1p

       Scroll [horizonal[p] vertical[p] | reverse]
              Scrolls the virtual desktop's viewport by horizontal pages in
              the x-direction and vertical pages in the y-direction or starts
              interactive scrolling of the viewport.  Either or both entries
              may be negative.  Both horizontal and vertical values are
              expressed in percent of pages, so

                  Scroll 100 100

              means to scroll down and right by one full page.

                  Scroll 50 25

              means to scroll right half a page and down a quarter of a page.
              The Scroll function should not be called from pop-up menus.
              Normally, scrolling stops at the edge of the desktop.

              If the horizontal and vertical percentages are 100 or more and
              are multiplied by 1000 then scrolling wraps around at the edge
              of the desktop.  If

                  Scroll 100000 0

              is executed over and over fvwm moves to the next desktop page on
              each execution and wraps around at the edge of the desktop, so
              that every page is hit in turn.

              If the letter 'p' is appended to each coordinate (horizontal
              and/or vertical), then the scroll amount is measured in pixels.

              Without arguments or if the option reverse is given interactive
              scrolling takes place.  The viewport scrolls as the mouse is
              moved.  With the reverse option scrolling is done in opposite
              direction of the mouse movement, and without it scrolling in the
              same direction as the mouse.

              The binding

                  Mouse 1 A CM Scroll reverse

              gives an effect of grabbing and dragging the viewport with
              button 1 if Control and Meta is pressed.

       Xinerama [bool]
              Enables Xinerama support if the boolean argument is true and
              disables it if the argument is false.  Calling this command
              without arguments turns on Xinerama support if it was disabled
              before and turns it off if it was enabled.  For example:

                  # Turn Xinerama support on, use primary screen 2
                  XineramaPrimaryScreen 2
                  Xinerama on
                  # Turn it off again
                  Xinerama off

       XineramaPrimaryScreen [primary-screen]
              Takes an integer number or 'g' or 'c' as its argument.  A number
              is taken as the number of the Xinerama screen that is to be used
              as the primary screen.  The primary screen can be used as the
              preferred screen to place windows with

                  XineramaPrimaryScreen <screen number>
                  Style * StartsOnScreen p

              The primary screen is used in some of the modules and for the
              default icon box too.  Any number that is zero or more is taken
              as the primary screen's number.  Instead, the letter 'c'
              indicates to use the current screen (containing the pointer)
              whenever the primary screen is used.  This may be very confusing
              under some circumstances.  With 'g', the global screen is used
              as the primary screen, effectively disabling the primary screen.
              Calling this function with any other argument (including none)
              resets the primary screen to 0.

       XineramaSls [bool]
              For multi-screen implementations other than Xinerama, such as
              Single Logical Screen, it is possible to simulate a Xinerama
              configuration if the total screen seen by fvwm is made up of
              equal sized monitors in a rectangular grid.  The XineramaSls
              command turns SLS support on or off or toggles it to the
              opposite state, depending on if the boolean argument is "True",
              "False" or "toggle".  If no argument is given, this is treated
              like "toggle".  The default layout uses one by one screens.  To
              configure the layout, use the XineramaSlsSize or
              XineramaSlsScreens command.

       XineramaSlsSize Horizontal Vertical
              This command configures the layout of the Single Logical screen
              feature.  It takes two arguments, Horizontal and Vertical which
              must be an integer value dividing evenly into the total desktop
              width, and height.  For an example with two monitors side by
              side which appear as one screen through the X-Server with the
              right screen as the primary screen, use:

                  XineramaSlsSize 2x1
                  XineramaSls On
                  XineramaPrimaryScreen 1
                  Xinerama On

       XineramaSlsScreens number-of-screens [screen-spec ...]
              This command configures the layout of the Single Logical screen
              feature.  Its first argument is the number of screens to use.
              It must be followed by exactly this number of screen-spec
              arguments.  Each of these can be written either in standard X
              geometry format: "<width>x<height>+<x>+<y>" or as a space
              separated list of numbers: "x y width height".  Both ways of
              describing screens can be mixed in a single command.  All four
              numbers must be supplied.  The x and y values specify the origin
              of the screen in relation to the global screen's origin while
              width and height specify the size of the screen in pixels.  No
              checks are done if the geometries make sense, so it is possible
              to define overlapping screens (with random results) or screens
              that are not visible at all.

                  XineramaSlsScreens 3 \
                    512x768+0+0 512x300+512+0 512 300 512 468
                  XineramaSls On
                  XineramaPrimaryScreen 1
                  Xinerama On

   User Functions and Shell Commands
       AddToFunc [name [I | J | M | C | H | D action]]
              Begins or adds to a function definition.  Here is an example:

                  AddToFunc Move-or-Raise I Raise
                   + M Move
                   + D Lower

              The function name is "Move-or-Raise", and it could be invoked
              from a menu or a mouse binding or key binding:

                  Mouse 1 TS A Move-or-Raise

              The name must not contain embedded whitespace.  No guarantees
              are made whether function names with embedded whitespace work or
              not.  This behavior may also change in the future without
              further notice.  The letter before the action tells what kind of
              action triggers the command which follows it.  'I' stands for
              "Immediate", and is executed as soon as the function is invoked.
              'J' is similar to "Immediate" but is delayed until a button is
              pressed or released or the pointer is moved, or the function
              completes.  It is always executed before the other function
              actions.  'M' stands for "Motion", i.e. if the user starts
              moving the mouse.  'C' stands for "Click", i.e., if the user
              presses and releases the mouse button.  'H' stands for "Hold",
              i.e. if the user presses a mouse button and holds it down for
              more than ClickTime milliseconds.  'D' stands for
              "Double-click".  The action 'I' causes an action to be performed
              on the button-press, if the function is invoked with prior
              knowledge of which window to act on.

              There is a number of predefined symbols that are replaced by
              certain values if they appear on the command line.  Please refer
              to the Command Expansion section for details.

              Warning
              Please read the comments on executing complex functions in the
              section Scripting and Complex Functions.

              Examples:

              If you call

                  Key F10 R A Function MailFunction xmh "-font fixed"

              and "MailFunction" is

                  AddToFunc MailFunction
                   + I Next ($0) Iconify off
                   + I Next (AcceptsFocus, $0) Focus
                   + I None ($0) Exec exec $0 $1

              Then the last line of the function becomes

                   + I None (xmh) Exec exec xmh -font fixed

              The expansion is performed as the function is executed, so you
              can use the same function with all sorts of different arguments.
              You could use

                  Key F11 R A Function MailFunction zmail "-bg pink"

              in the same config, if you wanted.  An example of using
              "$[w.id]" is:

                  AddToFunc PrintFunction
                   + I Raise
                   + I Exec xdpr -id $[w.id]

              Note that "$$" is expanded to '$'.

              Another example: bind right mouse button within the window
              button number 6 (this is a minimize button for the win95 theme)
              to iconify all windows of the same resource:

                  AddToFunc FuncIconifySameResource "I" All ($0) Iconify on
                  Mouse 3 6 A FuncIconifySameResource $[w.resource]

       Beep
              As might be expected, this makes the terminal beep.

       DestroyFunc function
              Deletes a function, so that subsequent references to it are no
              longer valid.  You can use this to change the contents of a
              function during a fvwm session.  The function can be rebuilt
              using AddToFunc.

                  DestroyFunc PrintFunction

       Echo string
              Prints a message to stderr.  Potentially useful for debugging
              things in your config.

                  Echo Beginning style definitions...

       EchoFuncDefinition function
              The EchoFuncDefinition is similar to the Echo command but prints
              the definition for the given function to stderr.  It is useful
              to find out how fvwm handles quoting and for debugging functions

       Exec command
              Executes command.  You should not use an ampersand '&' at the
              end of the command.  You probably want to use an additional
              "exec" at the beginning of command.  Without that, the shell
              that fvwm invokes to run your command stays until the command
              exits.  In effect, you'll have twice as many processes running
              as you need.  Note that some shells are smart enough to avoid
              this, but it never hurts to include the "exec" anyway.

              The following example binds function key F1 in the root window,
              with no modifiers, to the exec function.  The program rxvt is
              started with an assortment of options.

                  Key F1 R N Exec exec rxvt -fg yellow -bg blue \
                    -e /bin/tcsh

              Note that this function doesn't wait for command to complete, so
              things like:

                  Exec "echo AddToMenu ... > /tmp/file"
                  Read /tmp/file

              do not work reliably (see the PipeRead command).

       ExecUseShell [shell]
              Makes the Exec command use the specified shell, or the value of
              the $SHELL environment variable if no shell is specified,
              instead of the default Bourne shell (/bin/sh).

                  ExecUseShell
                  ExecUseShell /usr/local/bin/tcsh

       Function FunctionName
              Used to bind a previously defined function to a key or mouse
              button.  The following example binds mouse button 1 to a
              function called "Move-or-Raise", whose definition was provided
              as an example earlier in this man page.  After performing this
              binding fvwm executes the "move-or-raise" function whenever
              button 1 is pressed in a window's title-bar.

                  Mouse 1 T A Function Move-or-Raise

              The keyword Function may be omitted if FunctionName does not
              coincide with an fvwm command.

              Warning: Please read the comments on executing complex functions
              in the section Scripting and Complex Functions.

       InfoStoreAdd key value
              Stores the value at the given key.  This is useful to store
              generic information used in the lifetime of an fvwm config file.
              For example storing program preferences for opening video files.

              The purpose of this command is to store internal information to
              fvwm which can be used bu fvwm functions, or when opening
              programs of a certain type.  Previous to this command the only
              way to do this was via SetEnv but this is discouraged because it
              places such information in the environment, which pollutes it
              and makes the information global to other processes started by
              fvwm which may then modify them which might not be what's
              wanted.  Hence the point of InfoStoreAdd is to still allow for
              such information to be stored, but kept internal to fvwm.

              In this way, one can build up as many key/value pairs as needed.
              Recalling the value of a given key happens through fvwm's usual
              expansion mechanism.  See the Command Expansion section for more
              details.  For example:


                      InfoStoreAdd teddybearprog xteddy

                      # Echo the value of teddybearprog
                      Echo $[infostore.teddybearprog]

              Removing an entry from the InfoStore is done with the
              InfoStoreRemove command.

       InfoStoreRemove key
              Removes an entry at the given key from the InfoStore.  Example:


                  InfoStoreRemove teddybearprog

       Nop
              Does nothing.  This is used to insert a blank line or separator
              in a menu.  If the menu item specification is

                  AddToMenu MyMenu " " Nop

              then a blank line is inserted.  If it looks like

                  + "" Nop

              then a separator line is inserted.  Can also be used as the
              double-click action for Menu or Popup.

       PipeRead command [quiet]
              Causes fvwm to read commands from the output of the command.
              This command is executed by /bin/sh as if you typed it on the
              command line.  If the command consists of more than one word it
              must be quoted.  Useful for building up dynamic menu entries
              based on a directories contents, for example.  If the keyword
              Quiet follows the command no message is produced if the command
              is not found.

              Example:

                  AddToMenu HomeDirMenu
                  PipeRead 'for i in $HOME/*; \
                    do echo "+ $i Exec xterm -e vi $i"; done'

              Note: The PipeRead changes the pointer to a watch cursor by
              default during execution.  However, some commands, for example
              xwd, need to take control of the pointer themselves and do not
              work.  To disable the watch cursor, use the command prior to
              PipeRead

                  BusyCursor Read off

              The PipeRead command executes synchronously.  If you want to
              Exec something, but need the command to run synchronously, you
              might do something like:

                  PipeRead 'command 1>&2'

              The redirection causes any output from the program to go to
              stderr instead of being read as a sequence of commands by fvwm.
              PipeRead returns 1 if the given command could be executed or -1
              if not (see the section Conditional Commands for the meaning of
              return codes).

       Read filename [quiet]
              Causes fvwm to read commands from the file named filename.  If
              the keyword Quiet follows the command no message is produced if
              the file is not found.  If the file name does not begin with a
              slash ('/'), fvwm looks in the user's data directory, then the
              system data directory.  The user's data directory is by default
              $HOME/.fvwm.  It can be overridden by exporting FVWM_USERDIR set
              to any other directory.  The Read command returns 1 if the given
              file could be read or -1 if not (see the section Conditional
              Commands for the meaning of return codes).

       SetEnv variable value
              Set an environment variable to a new value, similar to the
              shell's export or setenv command.  The variable and its value
              are inherited by processes started directly by fvwm.  This can
              be especially useful in conjunction with the FvwmM4 module.  For
              example:

                  SetEnv height HEIGHT

              makes the FvwmM4 set variable HEIGHT usable by processes started
              by fvwm as the environment variable $height.  If value includes
              whitespace, you should enclose it in quotes.  If no value is
              given, the variable is deleted.

       Silent command
              A number of commands require a window to operate on.  If no
              window was selected when such a function is invoked the user is
              asked to select a window.  Sometimes this behavior is unwanted,
              for example if the function was called by a module and the
              window that was selected at first does not exist anymore.  You
              can prevent this by putting Silent in front of the fvwm command.
              If a function that needs a window is called with Silent without
              a window selected, it simply returns without doing anything.  If
              Silent is used on a user defined function it affects all
              function and sub function calls until the original function
              exits.

              Another usage of Silent is with binding commands Key, PointerKey
              and Mouse, this disables error messages.

              Silent also disables the error message for non-existent
              commands.  Note: This command is treated as a prefix to its
              command.  Expansion of the command line is done as if Silent was
              not there.

              Examples:

                  Silent Move 0 0
                  Silent User_defined_function
                  # do not complain on keyboards without "Help" key
                  Silent Key Help R A Popup HelpMenu

       UnsetEnv [variable]
              Unset an environment variable, similar to shell's export or
              unsetenv command.  The variable then is removed from the
              environment array inherited by processes started directly by
              fvwm.

       Wait window
              This command is intended to be used in fvwm functions only.  It
              causes execution of a function to pause until a new window
              matching window appears.  This can be a window's name, class, or
              resource string.  It may contain the wildcards '*' and '?',
              which are matched in the usual Unix filename manner.  This is
              particularly useful in the "InitFunction" if you are trying to
              start windows on specific desktops:

                  AddToFunc InitFunction
                   + I Exec exec xterm -geometry 80x64+0+0
                   + I Wait xterm
                   + I GotoDesk 0 2
                   + I Exec exec xmh -font fixed -geometry \
                         507x750+0+0
                   + I Wait xmh
                   + I GotoDesk 0 0

              The above function starts an xterm on the current desk, waits
              for it to map itself, then switches to desk 2 and starts an xmh.
              After the xmh window appears control moves to desk 0.

              Fvwm remains partially functional during a wait, but any input
              from the modules is queued up and processed only after the
              window appears or the command is aborted.  For example, windows
              can not be focused with FvwmIconMan or FvwmPager during a wait.

              You can escape from a Wait pause by pressing Ctrl-Alt-Escape
              (where Alt is the first modifier).  To redefine this key
              sequence see the EscapeFunc command.

   Conditional Commands
       Conditional commands are commands that are only executed if certain
       conditions are met.  Most conditional commands work on windows, like
       Next, ThisWindow or All.  There is one conditional command, Test, that
       works on global conditions unrelated to windows.  The syntax of the
       conditions is described below.  For readability, the list of conditions
       is located at the end of this section.

       Return Codes
              All commands in this section (unless specifically stated for the
              command) also have a return code that can be 1 (if the condition
              was met) or 0 (if the condition was not met).  Some commands may
              return -1 which means that an error occurred and the return code
              is useless.  The Break command returns -2.  Additionally, the
              return codes of commands run in a complex functions are passed
              to the invoking complex function.  The return code is used by
              the TestRc command.  Please refer to the commands' description
              for examples.  The return code can also be accessed through the
              variable $[cond.rc].  Non conditional commands do not modify the
              return code of the last conditional command.  Important note:
              return codes are only defined inside functions created with the
              AddToFunc command and are not inherited by sub functions.  To
              run a command without altering the return code, the KeepRc
              command can be used.

       The Ring of Windows
              Fvwm stores windows in a ring internally.  Think of the focused
              window as a cursor on the current position in the ring.  The
              Next command and many other commands search forwards through the
              ring for a matching window, and Prev searches backwards.  The
              windows in the ring are either ordered by creation time (if the
              !FPSortWindowlistByFocus, NeverFocus or MouseFocus styles are
              used) or by the last time they had the focus.

       List of Conditional Commands
              All [options] [(conditions)] command
                     Execute command on all windows meeting the conditions.
                     It returns 1 if any window matches the condition and 0
                     otherwise.  The execution starts at the top of the window
                     ring and continues towards the bottom.  The options can
                     be any combination of Reverse and UseStack.  If the
                     option Reverse is given the execution order is reversed.
                     The option UseStack makes All use the stacking order
                     instead of the window ring when walking through windows.
                     See the Conditions section for a list of conditions.

                     This command implies the conditions CirculateHit,
                     CirculateHitIcon and CirculateHitShaded.  They can be
                     turned off by specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.

              Any [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command if any window which satisfies all
                     conditions exists.  The command is run in the context of
                     the root window.  See the Conditions section for a list
                     of conditions.

              Break [levels]
                     If the break command is used in a function, function
                     execution is terminated immediately.  Further commands of
                     the function are not processed.  Normally, all nested
                     invocations of complex functions are left.  An optional
                     integer number levels may be given to break out of the
                     given number of nested functions and continue execution
                     of a higher level function.  The Break command always has
                     the return code -2.  Example:

                         AddToFunc PickWindowRaiseAndDeiconify
                         + I Pick
                         + I TestRc (Error) Break
                         + I Raise
                         + I Iconify off

              Current [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command on the currently focused window if it
                     satisfies all conditions.  See the Conditions section for
                     a list of conditions.

                     This command implies the conditions CirculateHit,
                     CirculateHitIcon and CirculateHitShaded.  They can be
                     turned off by specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.

              Direction [FromPointer] direction [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command (typically Focus) on a window in the
                     given direction which satisfies all conditions.
                     Normally, the center of the currently focused window or
                     the context window in which the command was invoked is
                     taken as the starting point.  Lacking such a window, or
                     when the FromPointer option is given, the current
                     position of the pointer is taken as the starting point.
                     The direction may be one of "North", "Northeast", "East",
                     "Southeast", "South", "Southwest", "West", "Northwest"
                     and "Center".  Which window Direction selects depends on
                     angle and distance between the center points of the
                     windows.  Closer windows are considered a better match
                     than those farther away.  The Center direction simply
                     selects the window closest to the starting point.
                     Returns -1 if an invalid direction was given.  See the
                     Conditions section for a list of conditions.

              KeepRc command
                     Runs the command but does not alter the return code of
                     the previous command.  Note: KeepRc is treated as a
                     prefix to its command.  Expansion of the command line is
                     done as if KeepRc was not there.

              Next [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command (typically Focus) on the next window
                     which satisfies all conditions.  If the command is
                     running in a window context, it starts looking for a
                     matching window from there.  Otherwise it starts at the
                     focused window.  See Conditions section for a list of
                     conditions.

              None [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command if no window which satisfies all
                     conditions exists.  The command is run in the context of
                     the root window.  Returns 1 if no window matches the
                     conditions and 0 otherwise.  See Conditions section for a
                     list of conditions.

                     This command implies the conditions CirculateHit,
                     CirculateHitIcon and CirculateHitShaded.  They can be
                     turned off by specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.

              NoWindow command
                     Performs command, but removes the window context if any.
                     This is not really a conditional command, but a prefix
                     that may be useful in menu items that should operate
                     without a window even if such menu is bound to window
                     decorations.

              Pick [(conditions)] command
                     Pick works like Function if invoked in the context of a
                     window.  If invoked in the root window, it first asks the
                     user to pick a window and then executes the command in
                     the context of that window.  This avoids annoying
                     multiple selections with complex functions.  The command
                     is executed only if the given conditions are met.
                     Returns -1 if no window was selected.  See Conditions
                     section for a list of conditions.

                     This command implies the conditions CirculateHit,
                     CirculateHitIcon and CirculateHitShaded.  They can be
                     turned off by specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.

              PointerWindow [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command if the window under the pointer
                     satisfies all conditions.  Returns -1 if there is no
                     window under the pointer.  See Conditions section for a
                     list of conditions.

                     This command implies the conditions CirculateHit,
                     CirculateHitIcon and CirculateHitShaded.  They can be
                     turned off by specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.

              Prev [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command (typically Focus) on the previous window
                     which satisfies all conditions.  If the command is
                     running in a window context, it starts looking for a
                     matching window from there.  Otherwise it starts at the
                     focused window.  See Conditions section for a list of
                     conditions.

              ScanForWindow [FromPointer] dir1 dir2 [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command (typically Focus) on a window in the
                     given direction which satisfies all conditions.
                     Normally, the center of the currently focused window or
                     the context window in which the command was invoked is
                     taken as the starting point.  Lacking such a window, or
                     when the FromPointer option is given, the current
                     position of the pointer is taken as the starting point.
                     The direction dir1 may be one of "North", "NorthEast",
                     "East", "SouthEast", "South", "SouthWest", "West", and
                     "NorthWest".  Which window ScanForWindow selects depends
                     first on the position along the primary axis given by
                     dir1.  If any windows have the exact same coordinate
                     along the primary axis, the secondary direction is used
                     to order the windows.  The direction dir2 may be one of
                     the same set of values as dir1.  If dir2 is not perfectly
                     perpendicular to dir1, ScanForWindow returns a failure.
                     When using ScanForWindow repeatedly with the same
                     arguments, it is guaranteed that all windows matching the
                     conditions will eventually be found.  If the focus
                     reaches a limit along the primary axis, it will wrap
                     around to the opposite side.  Returns -1 if an invalid
                     direction was given.  See Conditions section for a list
                     of conditions.

              Test [(test-conditions)] command
                     Performs command if all test-conditions are satisfied.
                     The test-conditions are keywords with possible arguments
                     from the list below and are separated by commas or
                     whitespace.  They include: Version operator x.y.z,
                     EnvIsSet varname, EnvMatch varname pattern,
                     EdgeHasPointer direction, EdgeIsActive direction, Start,
                     Init, Restart, Exit, Quit, ToRestart, True, False, F, R,
                     W, X and I.  A test-condition prefixed with "!" is
                     negated.

                     The Version operator x.y.z test-condition is fulfilled if
                     the logical condition of the expression is true.  Valid
                     operator values are: >=, >, <=, <, == and !=.

                     Example:

                         Test (Version >= 2.5.11) Echo 2.5.11 or later.

                     The EnvIsSet varname test-condition is true if the given
                     environment variable is set.  The EnvMatch varname
                     pattern test-condition is true if pattern matches the
                     given environment or infostore variable value.  (See
                     InfoStoreAdd).  The pattern may contain special "*" and
                     "?" chars.  The "varname" is coded without the leading
                     dollar sign ($).

                     The EdgeHasPointer [direction] test-condition is true if
                     the edge in the given direction currently contains the
                     pointer.  The EdgeIsActive [direction] test-condition is
                     true if the edge in the given direction currently is
                     active.  An edge is active, and can contain a pointer if
                     either a command is bound to it or edge scroll is
                     available in that direction.  The direction may be one of
                      Any, North, Top, Up, West, Left, South, Bottom,
                      Down, Right and  East.  If no direction is specified Any
                     is assumed.

                     The Start test-condition is the same as either Init or
                     Restart.  It is only true on startup or restart prior and
                     during StartFunction execution.  The Exit test-condition
                     is the same as either Quit or ToRestart.  It is only
                     valid on shutdown during ExitFunction function execution.

                     The True and False test-conditions are unconditionally
                     true and false.

                     Additionally, if a test-condition name is not recognized,
                     the Error return code is set and the command is not
                     executed.

                     The F file, R file, W file, X file and I file
                     test-conditions test for existence of the given [F]ile
                     (possibly with [R]ead/[W]rite permissions), e[X]ecutable
                     (in $PATH), or the [I]mage (in ImagePath).

                     Example:

                         AddToFunc StartFunction I Test (Init) Exec exec xterm

                         AddToFunc VerifyVersion
                         + I Test (Version 2.5.*) Echo 2.5.x detected
                         + I TestRc (NoMatch) \
                              Test (!Version 2.6.*) Echo Future version
                         + I TestRc (NoMatch) \
                              Echo 2.6.x is detected

                         Test (F $[FVWM_USERDIR]/local-config) Read local-config
                         Test (X xterm-utf16) Exec exec xterm-utf16

              TestRc [([!]returncode)] command
                     Performs command if the last conditional command returned
                     the value returncode.  Instead of the numeric values 0
                     (no match), 1 (match), -1 (error), and -2 (break) the
                     symbolic names "NoMatch", "Match", "Error" and "Break"
                     can be used.  If no returncode is given, the default 0 is
                     assumed.  If the return code is prefixed with '!', the
                     command is executed if returncode does not match the
                     value returned by the conditional command.  The TestRc
                     command can only be used inside functions.  If the
                     command is another conditional command, the previous
                     return code is replaced by the new one.  Example:

                         AddToFunc ToggleXterm
                         + I All (my_xtermwindow) Close
                         + I TestRc (NoMatch) Exec xterm -T my_xtermwindow

              ThisWindow [(conditions)] command
                     ThisWindow executes the specified command in the context
                     of the current operand window.  If there is no operand
                     window (it is invoked in the root window), the command is
                     ignored.  ThisWindow is never interactive.  The command
                     is executed only if the given conditions are met.  It
                     returns -1 if used outside a window context.  See
                     Conditions section for a list of conditions.

                     This command implies the conditions CirculateHit,
                     CirculateHitIcon and CirculateHitShaded.  They can be
                     turned off by specifying "!CirculateHit" etc.
                     explicitly.

              WindowId [id] [(conditions)] | [root [screen]] command
                     The WindowId command looks for a specific window id and
                     runs the specified command on it.  The second form of
                     syntax retrieves the window id of the root window of the
                     given screen.  If no screen is given, the current screen
                     is assumed.  The window indicated by id may belong to a
                     window not managed by fvwm or even a window on a
                     different screen.  Although most commands can not operate
                     on such windows, there are some exceptions, for example
                     the WarpToWindow command.  Returns -1 if no window with
                     the given id exists.  See Conditions section for a list
                     of conditions.

                     This command implies the conditions CirculateHit,
                     CirculateHitIcon and CirculateHitShaded.  They can be
                     turned off by specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.

                     Examples:

                         WindowId 0x34567890 Raise
                         WindowId root 1 WarpToWindow 50 50
                         WindowId $0 (Silly_Popup) Delete

                     In the past this command was mostly useful for functions
                     used with the WindowList command, or for selective
                     processing of FvwmEvent calls (as in the last example),
                     but currently these handler functions are called within a
                     window context, so this command is not really needed in
                     these cases.  Still it may be useful if, for example, the
                     window id should be stored in the environment variable
                     for a further proceeding.

                         Pick SetEnv BOOKMARKED_WINDOW $[w.id]
                         WindowId $[BOOKMARKED_WINDOW] WarpToWindow

       Conditions
              The conditions that may be given as an argument to any
              conditional command are a list of keywords separated by commas,
              enclosed in parentheses.  Unless stated otherwise, conditional
              commands accept all the conditions listed below.  Note that
              earlier versions of fvwm required the conditions to be separated
              by whitespace instead of commas and enclosed in brackets instead
              of parentheses (this is still supported for backward
              compatibility).

              In addition, the conditions may include one or more window names
              to match to.  If more than one window name is given, all of them
              must match.  The window name, icon name, class, and resource are
              considered when attempting to find a match.  Each name may
              include the wildcards '*' and '?', and may consist of two or
              more alternatives, separated by the character '|', which acts as
              an OR operator.  (If OR operators are used, they must not be
              separated by spaces from the names.) Each window name can begin
              with '!', which prevents command if any of the window name, icon
              name, class or resource match.  However, '!' must not be applied
              to individual names in a group separated by OR operators; it may
              only be applied to the beginning of the group, and then it
              operates on the whole group.

              Examples:

                  Next ("Netscape|konqueror|Mozilla*") WarpToWindow 99 90

              This goes to the next web browser window, no matter which of the
              three named web browsers is being used.

                  Next ("Mozilla*", "Bookmark*") WarpToWindow 99 90

              This goes to Mozilla's bookmark manager window, ignoring other
              Mozilla windows and other browsers' bookmark windows.

                  All ("XTerm|rxvt", !console) Iconify

              This iconifies all the xterm and rxvt windows on the current
              page, except that the one named "console" (with the -name option
              to xterm) is excluded.

                  Next (!"FvwmPager|FvwmForm*|FvwmButtons") Raise
                  Next (!FvwmPager, !FvwmForm*, !FvwmButtons) Raise

              These two commands are equivalent; either one raises the next
              window which is not one of the named fvwm modules.

              Any condition can be negated by using a an exclamation mark
              ('!')  directly in front of its name.

              AcceptsFocus, AnyScreen, CirculateHit, CirculateHitIcon,
              CirculateHitShaded, Closable, CurrentDesk, CurrentGlobalPage,
              CurrentGlobalPageAnyDesk, CurrentPage, CurrentPageAnyDesk,
              CurrentScreen, Desk, FixedPosition, FixedSize, Focused,
              HasHandles, HasPointer, Iconic, Iconifiable, Layer [n],
              Maximizable, Maximized, Overlapped, PlacedByButton n,
              PlacedByButton3, PlacedByFvwm, Raised, Shaded, State n, Sticky,
              StickyAcrossDesks, StickyAcrossPages, StickyIcon,
              StickyAcrossDesksIcon, StickyAcrossPagesIcon, Transient,
              Visible.

              The AcceptsFocus condition excludes all windows that do not want
              the input focus (the application has set the "Input hints" for
              the window to False) and do not use the Lenience option of the
              Style command.  Also, all windows using the NeverFocus style are
              ignored.  Note: !Lenience is equivalent to the deprecated option
              NoLenience.

              With the AnyScreen condition used together with any of the
              Current...  conditions, windows that do not intersect the
              Xinerama screen containing the mouse pointer are considered for
              a match too.  For example:

                  # Focus next window on current page,
                  # regardless of Xinerama screen
                  Next (CurrentPage, AnyScreen) Focus

              The CirculateHit and CirculateHitIcon options override the
              CirculateSkip and CirculateSkipIcon Style attributes for normal
              or iconic windows.  The CirculateHitShaded option overrides the
              CirculateSkipShaded Style.  All three options are turned on by
              default for the Current command.  They can be turned off by
              specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.  Note: Do not confuse
              these conditions with the style options of the same name.
              Specifically,

                  Style foo CirculateSkip
                  Next (foo, CirculateHit) ...

              is not the same as

                  Style foo CirculateHit ...
                  Next (foo)

              The prior selects windows with the name foo only in the Next
              command.  In the second example, these windows are always
              matched in all conditional commands.

              The Closable condition matches only windows that are allowed to
              be closed.

              The CurrentDesk condition matches only windows that are on the
              current desk.

              The CurrentGlobalPage condition matches only windows that are on
              the current page of the current desk, regardless of whether
              Xinerama support is enabled or not.  This condition implicitly
              activates the CurrentDesk condition.

              The CurrentGlobalPageAnyDesk condition matches only windows that
              are on the current page of any desk, regardless of whether
              Xinerama support is enabled or not.

              The CurrentPage condition matches only windows that are on the
              current page of the current desk.  If Xinerama support is
              enabled, it only matches windows that are at least partially on
              the Xinerama screen containing the mouse pointer.  This
              condition implicitly activates the CurrentDesk condition.

              The CurrentPageAnyDesk and CurrentScreen conditions matches only
              windows that are on the current page of any desk.  If Xinerama
              support is enabled, they only match windows that are at least
              partially on the Xinerama screen containing the mouse pointer.

              The Screen [n] condition matches only windows which are on the
              specified Xinerama screen.

              The Desk [n] condition matches only windows which are on the
              specified desk.

              The FixedPosition condition excludes all windows that do not
              have a fixed position, either set through WM hints or the Style
              option FixedPosition.  Example:

                  DestroyFunc ToggleFixedGeometry
                  AddToFunc   ToggleFixedGeometry
                  + I Pick (FixedPosition) \
                       WindowStyle VariablePosition, VariableSize
                  + I TestRc (NoMatch) WindowStyle FixedPosition, FixedSize

              The FixedSize condition excludes all windows that do not have a
              fixed size, either set through WM hints or the Style option
              FixedSize.

              The Focused matches on the window that currently has the
              keyboard focus.  This is not useful for the Current command but
              can be used with the other conditional commands.

              The HasHandles condition excludes all windows that do not have
              resize handles.

              The HasPointer condition excludes all windows that do not
              contain the pointer.

              The Iconic condition matches only iconic windows.

              The Iconifiable condition matches only windows that are allowed
              to be iconified.

              The Layer [n] condition matches only windows on the specified
              layer.  The optional argument of the Layer condition defaults to
              the layer of the focused window.  The negation !Layer switches
              off the Layer condition.

              The Maximizable condition matches only windows that are allowed
              to be maximized.

              The Maximized condition matches only maximized windows.

              The Overlapped condition matches only windows that are
              overlapped by other windows on the same layer (or unmanaged
              windows if the option RaiseOverUnmanaged of the BugOpts command
              is used).  Note that this condition can be slow if you have many
              windows or if RaiseOverUnmanaged is used and the connection to
              the X server is slow.

              The PlacedByButton n condition is fulfilled if the last
              interactive motion of the window (with the Move command or as
              ManualPlacement) was ended by pressing mouse button n.  Example:

                  Mouse   1 T     A       Function MoveWindow

                  DestroyFunc MoveWindow
                  AddToFunc MoveWindow
                  + C Move
                  + C ThisWindow (PlacedByButton 5) WindowShade off
                  + C TestRc (Match) Maximize on 0 100
                  + C ThisWindow (PlacedByButton 4) WindowShade on

              The PlacedByButton3 condition has the same meaning as
              PlacedByButton 3.  It remains only for backward compatibility.

              The PlacedByFvwm condition excludes all windows that have been
              placed manually or by using the user or program position hint.

              The Raised conditions matches only windows that are fully
              visible on the current viewport and not overlapped by any other
              window.

              The Shaded conditions matches only shaded windows (see
              WindowShade command).

              The State n or !State n conditions match only windows with the
              specified integer state set (or unset).  See the State command
              for details.  The argument may range from 0 to 31.

              The Sticky, StickyAcrossDesks and StickyAcrossPages match only
              windows that are currently sticky, sticky across all desks or
              sticky across all pages.  Please refer to the Style options with
              the same name and the commands Stick, StickAcrossDesks and
              StickAcrossPages for details.

              The StickyIcon, StickyAcrossDesksIcon and StickyAcrossPagesIcon
              match only windows that become sticky, sticky across all desks
              or sticky across all pages when they are in iconified state.

              The Transient condition matches only windows that have the
              "transient" property set by the application.  This it usually
              the case for application popup menus and dialogs.  The FvwmIdent
              module can be used to find out whether a specific window is
              transient.

              The Visible condition matches only windows that are at least
              partially visible on the current viewport and not completely
              overlapped by other windows.

   Module Commands
       Fvwm maintains a database of module configuration lines in a form

           *<ModuleName>: <Config-Resource>

       where <ModuleName> is either a real module name or an alias.

       This database is initially filled from config file (or from output of
       -cmd config command), and can be later modified either by user (via
       FvwmCommand) or by modules.

       When modules are run, they read appropriate portion of database.  (The
       concept of this database is similar to one used in X resource
       database).

       Commands for manipulating module configuration database are described
       below.

       * module_config_line
              Defines a module configuration.  module_config_line consists of
              a module name (or a module alias) and a module resource line.
              The new syntax allows a delimiter, a colon and optional spaces,
              between the module name and the rest of the line, this is
              recommended to avoid conflicts.

                  *FvwmPager: WindowBorderWidth 1
                  *FvwmButtons-TopRight: Geometry 100x100-0+0
                  *FvwmButtons-Bottom: Geometry +0-0

       DestroyModuleConfig module_config
              Deletes module configuration entries, so that new configuration
              lines may be entered instead.  This also sometimes the only way
              to turn back some module settings, previously defined.  This
              changes the way a module runs during a fvwm session without
              restarting.  Wildcards can be used for portions of the name as
              well.

              The new non-conflicting syntax allows a delimiter, a colon and
              optional spaces between the module name and the rest of the
              line.  In this case a module name (or alias) can't have
              wildcards.

                  DestroyModuleConfig FvwmButtons*
                  DestroyModuleConfig FvwmForm: Fore
                  DestroyModuleConfig FvwmIconMan: Tips*

       KillModule modulename [modulealias]
              Causes the module which was invoked with name modulename to be
              killed.  The name may include wildcards.  If modulealias is
              given, only modules started with the given alias are killed.

                  # kill all pagers
                  KillModule FvwmPager

                  Module FvwmEvent SoundEvent
                  KillModule FvwmEvent SoundEvent

       Module modulename [moduleparams]
              Specifies a module with its optional parameters which should be
              spawned.  Currently several modules, including FvwmButtons,
              FvwmEvent, FvwmForm, FvwmPager, FvwmScript support aliases.
              Aliases are useful if more than one instance of the module
              should be spawned.  Aliases may be configured separately using *
              syntax.  To start a module FvwmForm using an alias MyForm, the
              following syntax may be used:

                  Module FvwmForm MyForm

              At the current time the available modules (included with fvwm)
              are FvwmAnimate (produces animation effects when a window is
              iconified or de-iconified), FvwmAuto (an auto raise module),
              FvwmBacker (to change the background when you change desktops),
              FvwmBanner (to display a spiffy XBM, XPM, PNG or SVG),
              FvwmButtons (brings up a customizable tool bar), FvwmCommandS (a
              command server to use with shell's FvwmCommand client),
              FvwmConsole (to execute fvwm commands directly), FvwmCpp (to
              preprocess your config with cpp), FvwmEvent (trigger various
              actions by events), FvwmForm (to bring up dialogs), FvwmIconMan
              (a flexible icon manager), FvwmIdent (to get window info),
              FvwmM4 (to preprocess your config with m4), FvwmPager (a mini
              version of the desktop), FvwmPerl (a Perl manipulator and
              preprocessor), FvwmProxy (to locate and control obscured windows
              by using small proxy windows), FvwmRearrange (to rearrange
              windows), FvwmScript (another powerful dialog toolkit), These
              modules have their own man pages.  There may be other modules
              out on there as well.

              Modules can be short lived transient programs or, like
              FvwmButtons , can remain for the duration of the X session.
              Modules are terminated by the window manager prior to restarts
              and quits, if possible.  See the introductory section on
              modules.  The keyword Module may be omitted if modulename is
              distinct from all fvwm commands.

       ModuleListenOnly modulename [moduleparams]
              This command works like the Module command, but fvwm never sends
              any messages to the module.  This may be handy to write a module
              as a shell script that is triggered by external events without
              the burden to answer packets sent by fvwm.  For example, a
              module written as a shell script may change labels of the
              FvwmButtons module to implement a simple clock.

       ModulePath path
              Specifies a colon separated list of directories in which to
              search for modules.  To find a module, fvwm searches each
              directory in turn and uses the first file found.  Directory
              names on the list do not need trailing slashes.

              The ModulePath may contain environment variables such as $HOME
              (or ${HOME}).  Further, a '+' in the path is expanded to the
              previous value of the path, allowing easy appending or
              prepending to the path.

              For example:

                  ModulePath ${HOME}/lib/fvwm/modules:+

              The directory containing the standard modules is available via
              the environment variable $FVWM_MODULEDIR.

       ModuleSynchronous [Expect string] [Timeout secs] modulename
              The ModuleSynchronous command is very similar to Module.  Fvwm
              stops processing any commands and user input until the module
              sends a string beginning with "NOP FINISHED STARTUP" back to
              fvwm.  If the optional Timeout is given fvwm gives up if the
              module sent no input back to fvwm for secs seconds.  If the
              Expect option is given, fvwm waits for the given string instead.
              ModuleSynchronous should only be used during fvwm startup to
              enforce the order in which modules are started.  This command is
              intended for use with the (currently hypothetical) module that
              should be in place before other modules are started.

              Warning: It is quite easy to hang fvwm with this command, even
              if a timeout is given.  Be extra careful choosing the string to
              wait for.  Although all modules in the fvwm distribution send
              back the "NOP FINISHED STARTUP" string once they have properly
              started up, this may not be the case for third party modules.
              Moreover, you can try to escape from a locked ModuleSynchronous
              command by using the key sequence Ctrl-Alt-Escape (see the
              EscapeFunc).

       ModuleTimeout timeout
              Specifies how many seconds fvwm waits for a module to respond.
              If the module does not respond within the time limit then fvwm
              kills it.  timeout must be greater than zero, or it is reset to
              the default value of 30 seconds.

       SendToModule modulename string
              Sends an arbitrary string (no quotes required) to all modules,
              whose alias or name matching modulename, which may contain
              wildcards.  This only makes sense if the module is set up to
              understand and deal with these strings though.  Can be used for
              module to module communication, or implementation of more
              complex commands in modules.

   Session Management Commands
       Quit
              Exits fvwm, generally causing X to exit too.

       QuitScreen
              Causes fvwm to stop managing the screen on which the command was
              issued.

       Restart [window_manager [params]]
              Causes fvwm to restart itself if window_manager is left blank,
              or to switch to an alternate window manager (or other fvwm
              version) if window_manager is specified.  If the window manager
              is not in your default search path, then you should use the full
              path name for window_manager.

              This command should not have a trailing ampersand.  The command
              can have optional parameters with simple shell-like syntax.  You
              can use ~ (is expanded to the user's home directory) and
              environmental variables $VAR or ${VAR}.  Here are several
              examples:

                  Key F1 R N Restart
                  Key F1 R N Restart fvwm -s
                  Key F1 R N Restart ~/bin/fvwm -f $HOME/.fvwm/main
                  Key F1 R N Restart fvwm1 -s -f .fvwmrc
                  Key F1 R N Restart xterm -n '"X console"' \
                    -T \"X\ console\" -e fvwm1 -s

              If you need a native restart, we suggest only to use Restart
              command without parameters unless there is a reason not to.  If
              you still use an old command 'Restart fvwm2' that was correct in
              2.2.x, all current command line arguments are lost.  On a
              restart without parameters or with --pass-args, they are
              preserved.  Here are some cases when 'Restart fvwm2' or 'Restart
              fvwm' cause troubles:

                  * running fvwm under a session manager
                  * running fvwm with multi headed displays
                  * having command line arguments, like
                    -f themes-rc or -cmd
                  * if the first fvwm2 in the $PATH is a
                    different one

              This is why we are issuing a warning on an old usage.  If you
              really want to restart to fvwm with no additional arguments, you
              may get rid of this warning by using "Restart fvwm -s" or
              "Restart /full/path/fvwm".

              Note, currently with multi headed displays, restart of fvwms on
              different screens works independently.

       Restart --pass-args window_manager
              The same as Restart without parameters but the name for the
              current window manager is replaced with the specified
              window_manager and original arguments are preserved.

              This command is useful if you use initial arguments like

                  -cmd FvwmCpp

              and want to switch to another fvwm version without losing the
              initial arguments.

       Restart --dont-preserve-state [other-params]
              The same as

                  Restart [other-params]

              but it does not save any window states over the restart.

              Without this option, Restart preserves most per-window state by
              writing it to a file named .fs-restart-$HOSTDISPLAY in the
              user's home directory.

       SaveSession
              Causes a session manager (if any) to save the session.  This
              command does not work for xsm, it seems that xsm does not
              implement this functionality.  Use Unix signals to manage xsm
              remotely.

       SaveQuitSession
              Causes a session manager (if any) to save and then shutdown the
              session.  This command does not work for xsm, it seems that xsm
              does not implement this functionality.  Use Unix signals to
              manage xsm remotely.

   Colorsets
       Colorsets are a powerful method to control colors.  Colorsets create
       appearance resources that are shared by fvwm and its modules.  When a
       colorset is modified all parts of fvwm react to that change.  A
       colorset includes a foreground color, background color, shadow and
       highlight color (often based on the background color), background face
       (this includes images and all kinds of gradients).  There is a way to
       render background face and specify other color operations.

       In the 2.4.x versions a special module FvwmTheme was introduced to
       manage colorsets.  Starting with the 2.5.x beta version, the FvwmTheme
       functionality was moved to the core fvwm, so this module became
       obsolete.  In 2.6.7 the FvwmTheme module was removed.

       The old syntax:

           DestroyModuleConfig FvwmTheme: *
           *FvwmTheme: Colorset 0 fg black, bg rgb:b4/aa/94
           *FvwmTheme: Colorset 1 fg black, bg rgb:a1/b2/c8

       corresponds to the new syntax:

           CleanupColorsets
           Colorset 0 fg black, bg rgb:b4/aa/94
           Colorset 1 fg black, bg rgb:a1/b2/c8


       Colorset num [options]
              Creates or modifies colorset num.  Colorsets are identified by
              this number.  The number can start at zero and can be a very
              large number.

              Warning: The highest colorset number used determines memory
              consumption.  Thus, if you define 'Colorset 100000', the memory
              for 100001 colorsets is used.  Keep your colorset numbers as
              small as possible.

              By convention, colorsets are numbered like this:

                  # 0 = Default colors
                  # 1 = Inactive windows
                  # 2 = Active windows
                  # 3 = Inactive menu entry and menu background
                  # 4 = Active menu entry
                  # 5 = greyed out menu entry (only bg used)
                  # 6 = module foreground and background
                  # 7 = hilight colors

              If you need to have more colors and do not want to reinvent the
              wheel, you may use the convention used in fvwm-themes, it
              defines the meaning of the first 40 colorsets for nearly all
              purposes:

              http://fvwm-themes.sourceforge.net/doc/colorsets

              Each colorset has four colors, an optional pixmap and an
              optional shape mask.  The four colors are used by modules as the
              foreground, background, highlight and shadow colors.  When a
              colorset is created it defaults to a foreground of black and
              background of gray.  The background and foreground are marked as
              "average" and "contrast" (see later) so that just specifying a
              pixmap or gradient gives sensible results.

              options is a comma separated list containing some of the
              keywords: fg, Fore, Foreground, bg, Back, Background, hi,
              Hilite, Hilight, sh, Shade, Shadow, fgsh, Pixmap, TiledPixmap,
              AspectPixmap, Transparent, RootTransparent, Shape, TiledShape,
              AspectShape, NoShape, ?Gradient, Tint, fgTint, bgTint, Alpha,
              fgAlpha, Dither, NoDither, IconTint, IconAlpha, Plain.

              fg, Fore and Foreground take a color name as an argument and set
              the foreground color.  The special name Contrast may be used to
              select a color that contrasts well with the background color.
              To reset the foreground color to the default value you can
              simply omit the color name.

              bg, Back and Background take a color name as an argument and set
              the background color.  It also sets the highlight and shadow
              colors to values that give a 3d effect unless these have been
              explicitly set with the options below.  The special name Average
              may be used to select a color that is the average color of the
              pixmap.  If the pixmap is tinted with the Tint option, the tint
              is not taken in account in the computation of the average color.
              You should use the bgTint option to get the "real" average
              color.  The background color is reset to the default value if
              the color name is omitted.

              hi, Hilite and Hilight take a color name as an argument and set
              the highlight color.  If the highlight color is not explicitly
              set, the default is to calculate it from the background color.
              To switch back to the default behavior the color name can be
              omitted.

              sh, Shade and Shadow take a color name as an argument and set
              the shadow color.  If the shadow color is not explicitly set,
              the default is to calculate it from the background color.  To
              switch back to the default behavior the color name can be
              omitted.

              fgsh takes a color name as an argument and sets the color used
              by the shadowing font effect.  See the Font Shadow Effects
              section of the fvwm man page.  By default this color is computed
              from the foreground and background colors.  To switch back to
              the default the color name can be omitted.

              Pixmap, TiledPixmap and AspectPixmap take a file name as an
              argument, search the ImagePath and use it as the background
              pixmap.  Any transparent parts are filled with the background
              color.  Not specifying a file name removes any existing image
              from the colorset.  TiledPixmap produces repeated copies of the
              image with no scaling, Pixmap causes the image to be stretched
              to fit whatever object the colorset is applied to and
              AspectPixmap stretches to fit but retains the image aspect
              ratio.

              Transparent creates a transparent background pixmap.  The pixmap
              is used as a window background to achieve root transparency.
              For this you should use the ParentalRelativity option to the
              Style command.  A subsequent root background change may be
              detected or not, this depends on the program used to set the
              background.  If you use fvwm-root, xsetbg (xli), FvwmBacker with
              solid or colorset colors or a recent version of Esetroot (>=
              9.2) a background change is detected.  If background changes are
              not detected (e.g., if you use xv or xsetroot) you can force
              detection by using the -d option of fvwm-root:

                  xv -root -quit mybg.png; fvwm-root -d

              Due to the way X implements transparency no guarantees can be
              made that the desired effect can be achieved.  The application
              may even crash.  If you experience any problems with this
              option, do not use it.

              Using outline move and resize (see the OpaqueMoveSize command
              and the ResizeOpaque Style option) as well as setting the
              WindowShadeShrinks style may help.  The transparency achieved
              with Transparent depends on whether the colorset is applied to
              the foreground or the background of a window.  In the second
              case the transparency is relative to the parent window of the
              window on which the colorset is defined.  For example:

                  Colorset 12 VGradient 200 grey30 grey60
                  Colorset 17 Transparent
                  *FvwmIconMan: Colorset 12
                  *FvwmIconMan: PlainColorset 17

              gives an IconMan with a vertical grey gradient background and
              the buttons use the background (by transparency).  To obtain a
              (root) transparent IconMan:

                  Colorset 12 Transparent
                  Colorset 17 Transparent
                  Colorset 18 Transparent
                  Colorset 19 Transparent

                  *FvwmIconMan: Colorset 12
                  *FvwmIconMan: PlainColorset 17
                  *FvwmIconMan: FocusColorset 18
                  *FvwmIconMan: IconColorset  19

              The Colorset IconMan option defines the IconMan window
              background, but the PlainColorset and the FocusColorset are
              drawn on the foreground.  So, the transparency of the IconMan
              buttons is achieved by drawing nothing.  Now if this IconMan is
              swallowed in an FvwmButtons as:

                  FvwmButtons:(Colorset 10, Swallow "FvwmIconMan" 'FvwmIconMan')

              then, FvwmIconMan becomes a child of FvwmButtons and it is
              transparent relative to FvwmButtons.  So, in this case
              FvwmIconMan uses Colorset 10 as background.  If you want root
              transparency use the RootTransparent option.  FvwmButtons
              FvwmIconMan, and FvwmIdent, are relatively simple.  There is one
              main colorset option which defines the background of the window
              and the other colorsets (if any) are drawn on the foreground.
              The case of FvwmProxy is simpler, the two colorsets refer to the
              window backgrounds.  FvwmPager is more complicated as almost
              everything in the pager are windows with some parental relations
              (the mini windows are the child and the desktops are the parents
              and all this is complicated by the hilighted page).  So, the
              colorsets apply to the background of these windows.  You should
              experiment.  For FvwmForm and FvwmScript the situation is
              similar.  There is a main window (a child of the root window)
              which corresponds to the main colorset and most of the widgets
              are windows which are children of the main window.  Tint may
              work or not with the Transparent option.  When the colorset is
              drawn on the foreground Tint should work.  In some cases,
              tinting may be very slow.  Tinting may work with fvwm menu
              (without animation).  Tinting may work better if your X server
              has backing store enabled (try xdpyinfo to see if this the
              case).  There is a chance that the backing store support of your
              X server does not work well with the terrible hack used to Tint
              the ParentRelative Pixmap.  So, to get tinted root transparency
              it is more safe to use the RootTransparent option.

              RootTransparent [ buffer ] creates a root transparent
              background.  To make this option work, you must use an Esetroot
              compatible program, fvwm-root with the --retain-pixmap option or
              FvwmBacker with the RetainPixmap option (and colorset or solid
              backgrounds).  The buffer keyword is useful only when the Tint
              option is used too.  This speeds up creation of windows which
              use the colorset (useful for fvwm menus) at the cost of memory
              usage.  It also speeds up opaque move and resize which can be
              unacceptably slow without buffer.  However, this option may add
              a lot of memory to your X server (depending on the size of the
              image used to set the background).  In summary, using outline
              move and resize for modules which use such a colorset may be a
              good idea.

              Shape, TiledShape and AspectShape take a file name as an
              argument, search the ImagePath and use it as the shape bitmap.
              TiledShape produces repeated copies of the bitmap with no
              scaling, Shape causes the bitmap to be stretched to fit whatever
              object the colorset is applied to and AspectShape stretches to
              fit but retains the bitmap aspect ratio.  If the file is a
              pixmap in xpm format the shape mask (all opaque pixels) of the
              pixmap is used.  For png and svg images, the shape mask is
              equivalent to all not completely transparent pixels (alpha > 0).

              Warning
              Due to the way X11 implements shapes you cannot take back making
              windows shaped. You may have to restart fvwm or the shaped
              application.

              ?Gradient ...  creates a pixmap and stretches it to fit the
              window.  ?Gradient may be one of HGradient, VGradient,
              DGradient, BGradient, SGradient, CGradient, RGradient or
              YGradient.  The gradient types are as follows: H is horizontal;
              V is vertical; D is diagonal from top left to bottom right; B is
              a backwards diagonal from bottom left to top right; S is
              concentric squares; C is concentric circles; R is a radar like
              pattern and Y is a Yin Yang style (but without the dots).
              Please refer to the Color Gradients section for the syntax of
              gradients.

              Tint takes 2 arguments, a color and a percentage between 0 and
              100.  It causes the image defined using ?Pixmap or ?Gradient to
              be tinted with the specified color using the percentage.  If the
              image is transparent Tint tints only the image part.
              Unfortunately, a colorset background specified using the
              Transparent option can give strange results.  See the
              Transparent option for details.  With no arguments this option
              removes the tint.

              fgTint takes 2 arguments, a color and a percentage between 0 and
              100.  It causes the color defined using fg to be tinted with the
              specified color using the percentage.  With no arguments this
              option removes the tint.

              bgTint takes 2 arguments, a color and a percentage between 0 and
              100.  It causes the color defined using bg to be tinted with the
              specified color using the percentage.  If the sh and hi colors
              are not specified, they are recomputed from the tinted bg color.
              With no arguments this option removes the tint.

              Alpha takes a percentage between 0 and 100 as an argument.  It
              causes fvwm to merge the image defined using ?Pixmap or
              ?Gradient with the bg color using the percentage.  If the
              percentage is 0 the image is hidden and if it is 100 the image
              is displayed as usual (no merge).  The default is 100 and it is
              restored if no argument is given.

              fgAlpha takes a percentage between 0 and 100 as an argument.  It
              causes fvwm to merge the text and the colorset background using
              the percentage.  If the percentage is 0 the text is hidden and
              if it is 100 the text is displayed as usual (no merge).  This
              option has an effect only with fonts loaded by Xft, see the Font
              Names and Font Loading section.  The default is 100 and it is
              restored if no argument is given.

              Dither causes fvwm to dither the image defined using ?Pixmap or
              ?Gradient.  This is useful only with displays with depth less
              than or equal to 16 (i.e., on displays which can only display
              less than 65537 colors at once).  The dithering effect lets you
              simulate having more colors available that you actually have.
              NoDither causes fvwm to do not dither the images.  Dither is the
              default if the depth is less than or equal to 8 (a screen with
              256 colors or less).  In depth 15 (32768 colors) and 16 (65536
              colors), the default is NoDither, however this effect can be
              useful with images which contain a lot of close colors.  For
              example a fine gradient looks more smooth.

              IconTint takes 2 arguments, a color and a percentage between 0
              and 100.  It causes fvwm or a module to tint the "icons" which
              are rendered into the colorset background with the specified
              color using a percentage.  Here "icons" means, fvwm Icons, fvwm
              menu icons, MiniIcons which represent applications in various
              modules, images loaded by modules (e.g., images specified by the
              Icon FvwmButtons button option) ...etc.  With no arguments this
              option removes the icon tint.

              IconAlpha takes a percentage between 0 and 100 as an argument.
              It causes fvwm to merge the "icons" which are rendered into the
              colorset background using this percentage.  The default is 100
              and it is restored if no argument is given.

              Note: It is equivalent to use "Tint a_color rate" and "Alpha a"
              if a = 100 and the bg color is a_color.  This equivalence does
              not hold for IconAlpha and IconTint as the background can be an
              image or a gradient (and not a uniform color background).
              However, in some cases you can achieve (almost) the same effect
              by using IconTint in the place of IconAlpha.  This is preferable
              as, in general, IconAlpha generates more redrawing than
              IconTint.

              NoShape removes the shape mask from the colorset while Plain
              removes the background pixmap or gradient.

              Examples

                  Colorset 3 fg tan, bg navy

              If necessary this creates colorsets 0, 1, 2 and 3 and then
              changes colorset 3 to have a foreground of tan, a background of
              navy.

                  Colorset 3 bg "navy blue"

              changes the background color of colorset 3 to navy blue.  The
              foreground and pixmap are unchanged.

                  Colorset 3 AspectPixmap large_murky_dungeon.xpm

              causes depression.

                  Colorset 3 bg Average

              Sets the background color and the relief colors to match the
              background pixmap.  This is the default setting but it must be
              used if a background color was specified and is now not
              required.

                  Colorset 3 YGradient 200 3 blue 1000 navy 1 blue 1000 navy

              Adds a Yin Yang gradient background pixmap to colorset 3.  If
              the background is set to average it is recomputed along with the
              foreground if that is set to contrast.

                  #!/bin/sh
                  FvwmCommand "Colorset 7 fg navy, bg gray"
                  while true
                  do
                    FvwmCommand "Colorset 7 fg gray"
                    sleep 1
                    FvwmCommand "Colorset 7 fg navy"
                    sleep 1
                  done

              Makes colorset 7 blink.

              The color names used in colorsets are saved as fvwm variables
              which can be substituted in any fvwm command.  For example:

                  AddToFunc InitFunction
                  + I Exec exec xterm -fg $[fg.cs0] -bg $[bg.cs0]

              Where $[fg.cs0] is the foreground color of colorset zero.
              Please refer to the Command Expansion section for more
              information.

       CleanupColorsets
              Resets a definition of all colorsets.

       Color Gradients
              A color gradient is a background that changes its color
              gradually from one hue to a different one.  Color gradients can
              be used by various commands and modules of fvwm.  There are
              eight types of gradients: HGradient is a horizontal gradient,
              VGradient is vertical, DGradient is diagonal from top left to
              bottom right, BGradient is backwards diagonal from bottom left
              to top right, SGradient is concentric squares, CGradient is
              concentric circles, RGradient is a radar like pattern and
              YGradient is a Yin Yang style (but without the dots).

              The color gradient syntax has two forms:

              ?Gradient colors start-color end-color

              This form specifies a linear gradient.  The arguments denote the
              total number of colors to allocate (between 2 and 1000), the
              initial color and the final color.

              Example:

                  TitleStyle VGradient 20 rgb:b8/ce/bc rgb:5b/85/d0

              ?Gradient colors segments color length color [length color] ...

              The second form specifies a nonlinear gradient.  The arguments
              are: the total number of colors to allocate (between 2 and
              1000), then the number of segments.  For each segment, specify
              the starting color, a relative length, then the ending color.
              Each subsequent segment begins with the second color of the last
              segment.  The lengths may be any non-negative integers.  The
              length of one segment divided by the sum of all segments lengths
              is the fraction of the colors that are used for the segment.

              Examples:

                  MenuStyle * \
                       MenuFace DGradient 128 2 lightgrey 50 blue 50 white

                  # 20% gradient from red to blue,
                  # 30% from blue to black,
                  # 50% from black to grey
                  MenuStyle * \
                       MenuFace DGradient 100 3 Red 20 Blue 30 Black 50 Grey

                  # 50% from blue to green, then
                  # 50% from yellow to red
                  Colorset 0 HGradient 128 3 Blue 1000 Green 1 Yellow 1000 Red

ENVIRONMENT
       The environment variables that have an effect on how fvwm operates are
       the following:

       DISPLAY
           Fvwm starts on this display unless the -display option is given.

       FVWM_MODULEDIR
           Set by fvwm to the directory containing the standard fvwm modules.

       FVWM_USERDIR
           Used to determine the user's data directory for reading and
           sometimes writing personal files.  If this variable is not already
           set, it is set by fvwm to $HOME/.fvwm, which is the default user's
           data directory.

       SESSION_MANAGER
           Fvwm tries to contact this session manager.

       SESSION_MANAGER_NAME
           This is used mainly to determine xsm running to work around its
           bug.  If this variable is set to "xsm", DiscardCommand is set as
           xsm expects it and not as XSMP requires.  If you run fvwm under
           xsm, you should set this variable to "xsm", otherwise old state
           files are not removed.

       SM_SAVE_DIR
           If this is set, fvwm saves its session data in this directory.
           Otherwise it uses $HOME.  Note, the state files are named
           .fs-??????  and normally are removed automatically when not used
           anymore.

AUTHORS
       Robert Nation with help from many people, based on twm code, which was
       written by Tom LaStrange.  After Robert Nation came Charles Hines,
       followed by Brady Montz.  Currently fvwm is developed by a number of
       people on the fvwm-workers mailing list.

COPYRIGHT
       Fvwm and all the modules, scripts and other files coming with the
       distribution are subject to the GNU General Public License (GPL).
       Please refer to the COPYING file that came with fvwm for details.

BUGS
       Bug reports can be sent to the fvwm-workers mailing list at
       <fvwm-workers@fvwm.org>

       The official fvwm homepage is http://fvwm.org/.



                                  06-Nov-2016                          FVWM(1)